Introduction
12/07/13 16:36:24 31TM8630_002
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2013 Honda Insight was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance MinderTM shown in
the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it
preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in
mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many
systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction
and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Revised 09/2013
2013 Insight
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Navigation Key
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Chapter Table of Contents
Index
Book Table of Contents
i
12/07/13 16:36:31 31TM8630_003
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:36:42 31TM8630_004
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of
others, is very important.
And operating this vehicle safely
is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of
forms, including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
and one of
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read
it carefully.
2013 Insight
iii
12/07/13 16:36:55 31TM8630_006
Navigation Key
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Contents
Chapter Table of Contents
Index
Book Table of Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ........ 59
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and other convenience items) ............. 161
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 243
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 261
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 297
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ......................................... 347
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 377
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 393
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 397
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
Service Information Summary
2013 Insight
1
12/07/13 16:37:13 31TM8630_007
Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
the multi-information display, and
how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Features
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.
2
Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park.
Maintenance
The Maintenance MinderTM shows
you when you need to take your
vehicle to the dealer for maintenance
service. There is also a list of things
to check and instructions on how to
check them.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
2013 Insight
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index
Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
12/07/13 16:37:19 31TM8630_008
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.62)
GAUGES (P.72)
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY (P.72, P.75)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON(P.125)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*2
AUDIO SYSTEM (P.168)
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG
(P.10)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.147)
PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
(P.10)
ECON BUTTON
(P.127)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.162)
DOOR LOCK TAB
(P.133)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.133)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(CVT)
(P.271)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.149)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.248)
PADDLE SHIFTERS*1
(P.276)
EX model with navigation system is shown.
USB ADAPTER CABLE*1
(P.197, P.205)
* 1 : If equipped
* 2 : Refer to the navigation system manual.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
3
12/07/13 16:37:27 31TM8630_009
Your Vehicle at a Glance
KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB
(P.73)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB
(P.124)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.120)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.119)
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS*2 (P.222)
MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS*2 (P.76)
HORN*1
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*3/
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.168)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROL BUTTONS*2
(P.217)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.35)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) OFF
SWITCH
(P.294)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR*2
(P.126, P.148)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS*3
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS*2 (P.225)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
(P.155)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS (P.128)
EX model with navigation system is shown.
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS*2 (P.76)
* 1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
* 2 : If equipped
* 3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
4
2013 Insight
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK*2
(P.218)
12/07/13 16:37:31 31TM8630_010
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 8
Seat Belts ........................................ 9
Airbags .......................................... 10
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 12
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 12
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 14
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 15
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 16
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 17
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 18
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 21
Seat Belt System Components ... 21
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 23
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 24
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 25
Airbag System Components ....... 25
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 33
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 34
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 35
Airbag Service .............................. 36
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Protecting Children−General
Guidelines ................................. 38
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 38
2013 Insight
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 39
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 39
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 41
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 41
Additional Safety Precautions .... 42
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 43
Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Protecting Small Children .......... 44
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
With LATCH ................................ 47
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 49
With a Tether ............................... 51
Protecting Larger Children ............ 52
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 52
Using a Booster Seat ................... 53
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 54
Additional Safety Precautions .... 55
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
Safety Labels .................................... 57
5
12/07/13 16:37:38 31TM8630_011
Important Safety Precautions
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
6
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 17 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 38 − 55 ).
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:37:44 31TM8630_012
Important Safety Precautions
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Safely
Engaging in mobile phone
conversation or other activities that
keep you from paying close attention
to the road, other vehicles and
pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
Keep Your
Vehicle in Safe Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 338 ).
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
2013 Insight
7
12/07/13 16:37:50 31TM8630_013
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(6)
TOC
(9)
(12)
Driver and Passenger Safety
(8)
(3)
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(9)
(4)
(10)
(8)
(10)
(11)
(7)
(5)
(2)
8
(1)
(7)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Seat Belt Tensioners
(12) Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensor
2013 Insight
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
the correct position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
12/07/13 16:38:01 31TM8630_014
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
TOC
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
− frontal impacts
− side impacts
− rear impacts
− rollovers
2013 Insight
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
9
12/07/13 16:38:08 31TM8630_015
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
28 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
10
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 32 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
2013 Insight
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side or front impact (see
page 33 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
12/07/13 16:38:14 31TM8630_016
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
collisions, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do
their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
2013 Insight
11
12/07/13 16:38:23 31TM8630_017
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
Introduction
The following pages provide
TOC instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages 38 − 55 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
hatch are closed and locked.
Your vehicle has a door/
hatch open indicator (red)
on the instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the hatch is not
tightly closed.
See page 133 for how to lock the
doors, and page 68 for how the door/
hatch open indicator works.
Your vehicle also has a door and
hatch open indicator on the multiinformation display to indicate
when a specific door or the
hatch is not tightly closed.
You will see the appropriate
indicator(s) for each condition.
12
2013 Insight
You will also hear a beep when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and each time you open
any door or the hatch with the key in
the ON (II) position.
The above illustration shows that all
doors and the hatch are open.
12/07/13 16:38:29 31TM8630_018
Protecting Adults and Teens
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Locking the doors and the hatch also
helps prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door or the
hatch when you come to a stop.
When the hatch is not tightly closed,
this indicator will come on.
When one or more doors or the
hatch are not tightly closed, the
corresponding indicator for each
condition will come on.
Your vehicle has the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page 108 .
The above example shows the front
right and rear left doors, and the
hatch open.
2013 Insight
13
12/07/13 16:38:36 31TM8630_019
Protecting Adults and Teens
2.Adjust the Front Seats
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
14
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 128 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
2013 Insight
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
See page 141 for how to adjust the
front seats.
12/07/13 16:38:42 31TM8630_020
Protecting Adults and Teens
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 141 for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their
seat- back to a comfortable,
upright position.
2013 Insight
15
12/07/13 16:38:48 31TM8630_021
Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint
so the center of the back of your
head rests against the center of
the restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
16
2013 Insight
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 142 for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
12/07/13 16:38:54 31TM8630_022
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
5.Fasten and
Position the Seat Belts
TOC Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
17
12/07/13 16:39:02 31TM8630_023
Protecting Adults and Teens
RELEASE BUTTONS
TOC
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
Driver and Passenger Safety
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
The front seats have adjustable
seat belt anchors. To adjust the
height of an anchor, squeeze the
two release buttons, and slide the
anchor up or down as needed (it
has four positions).
18
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 21 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
2013 Insight
6.Maintain a Proper
Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
12/07/13 16:39:08 31TM8630_024
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
TOC seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
2013 Insight
Each time you have a checkup,
ask your doctor if it’s okay for
you to drive.
19
12/07/13 16:39:16 31TM8630_025
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
TOC
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Driver and Passenger Safety
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in
a crash.
20
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
2013 Insight
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
12/07/13 16:39:24 31TM8630_026
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
TOC shoulder belts in all seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
Seat Belt Indicator
The seat belt system includes an
indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and
your front passenger to fasten your
seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
2013 Insight
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
In addition to the seat belt reminder
indicator in the instrument panel,
you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message. This remains
displayed if you ignore it and do not
fasten the seat belt while driving.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or an infant or
small child is riding there, the
indicator may not come on and the
beeper may not sound.
CONTINUED
21
12/07/13 16:39:32 31TM8630_027
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
TOC belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object on the floor that is
touching the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
22
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 17 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting
the vehicle, be sure the belt is out
of the way and will not get
closed in the door.
2013 Insight
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page 49 ).
12/07/13 16:39:38 31TM8630_028
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
TOC retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
To deactivate the lockable
retractor, unlatch the buckle
and let the seat belt fully retract.
To refasten the seat belt, pull it out
only as far as needed.
Allowing a child to play with a
seat belt or wrap one around
their neck can result in serious
injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with
any seat belt and make sure
any unused seat belt a child
can reach is buckled, fully
retracted, and locked.
The tensioners can be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
If the tensioner is activated, the SRS
indicator comes on and the tensioner
must be replaced.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
2013 Insight
23
12/07/13 16:39:44 31TM8630_029
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
TOC condition of your seat belts regularly.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
331 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly
will not provide good protection
and should be replaced as soon
as possible.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
you should have your dealer inspect
the belt, and replace it if necessary.
A belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet
for details.
24
2013 Insight
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
12/07/13 16:39:51 31TM8630_030
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
(13)
(9) (8)
(2)
(11)
(14)
(5)
(1)
(4)
(8)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3)
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5)
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(6)
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(10)
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensor
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) SRS Indicator
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
(15) Safing Sensor
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16)
(4)
(15)
(14)
(16)
(7)(12)
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
25
12/07/13 16:39:58 31TM8630_031
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your Airbag System includes:
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 32 ).
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 23 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 32 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The
front and rear pillars are
marked ‘‘SIDE CURTAIN
AIRBAG’’ (see page 33 ).
26
2013 Insight
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page 21 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor
that monitors the distance of the
seat from the front airbag. If the
seat is too far forward, the
airbag will inflate with less force
(see page 30 ).
12/07/13 16:40:04 31TM8630_032
Additional Information About Your Airbags
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight
of an infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 30 ).
A sophisticated electronic
system that continually monitors
and records information about
the sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use
when the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 34 ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbag system
components (see page 34 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
2013 Insight
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 35 ).
27
12/07/13 16:40:12 31TM8630_033
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 35 ).
The total time for inflation and
deflation is less than a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
28
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:40:17 31TM8630_034
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
TOC powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not
harmful, people with respiratory
problems may experience some
temporary discomfort. If
this occurs, get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so.
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold
Front Airbags (SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dualstage, multiple-threshold front
airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash
severe enough to cause one or both
front airbags to deploy, the airbags
can inflate at different rates,
depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts
are latched, and/or other factors.
Front airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help
reduce the likelihood of head and
chest injuries in frontal crashes.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
29
12/07/13 16:40:26 31TM8630_035
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your front airbags are also advanced
TOC airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Objects placed or pushed under
the front passenger’s seat may
cause the sensor to malfunction,
increasing the risk of injury in a
crash.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
30
DRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
2013 Insight
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
12/07/13 16:40:33 31TM8630_036
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
TOC airbag to be turned off.
Driver and Passenger Safety
When the passenger airbag gets
turned off by the weight sensors, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 35 ).
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag is automatically turned off.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not
come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
Back seat passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
2013 Insight
31
12/07/13 16:40:41 31TM8630_037
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag may not deploy if there is
no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Although Honda does not
encourage children to ride in front,
if the position sensors detect a
child has leaned into the side
airbag’s deployment path, the
airbag will shut off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
32
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front
passenger’s seat.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:40:48 31TM8630_038
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 34 ), have the
TOC passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
How Your
Side Curtain Airbags Work
One or both side curtain airbags may
inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal collision which causes the
front airbags to deploy.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
In a moderate to severe side
impact, sensors will detect
rapid acceleration and signal the
control unit to instantly inflate the
side curtain airbag.
2013 Insight
33
12/07/13 16:41:01 31TM8630_039
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the SRS Indicator
Works
TOC The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbag
system components.
U.S.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbag system components
may not work properly when you
need them.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
34
2013 Insight
Canada
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
and then go off (see page 65 ). If
it doesn’t come on, stays on, or
comes on while driving without a
passenger in the front seat, have the
system checked.
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display.
12/07/13 16:41:09 31TM8630_040
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
TOC
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S.
Driver and Passenger Safety
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S.
Canada
Canada
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
On vehicle without navigation system
On vehicle with navigation system
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
35
12/07/13 16:41:19 31TM8630_041
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
TOC on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object on the floor that is
touching the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
We recommend against the use
of salvaged airbag system
components, including the
airbag, tensioners, sensors,
and control unit.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
36
2013 Insight
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.
12/07/13 16:41:24 31TM8630_042
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions
TOC
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
Driver and Passenger Safety
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009 in the US, or
Honda Customer Relations at
1-888-9-HONDA-9 in Canada.
2013 Insight
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side
airbag cutoff system from
working properly.
37
12/07/13 16:41:31 31TM8630_043
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are
injured or killed in vehicle
crashes because they are either
unrestrained or not properly
restrained. In fact, vehicle collisions
are the number one cause of the
death of children age 12 and under.
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever
need to drive with a child in your
vehicle, be sure to read this
section. It begins with important
general guidelines, then presents
special information for infants,
small children, and larger children.
38
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state,
Canadian province and territory
requires that infants and children be
properly restrained when they ride in
a vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 43 − 51 ).
2013 Insight
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 52 − 55 ).
12/07/13 16:41:41 31TM8630_044
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Should
Sit in a Back Seat
TOC According to crash statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off under certain
circumstances (see page 35 ), please
follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
force to kill or very seriously injure
an infant.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page 52 for important
information about protecting
larger children.)
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
39
12/07/13 16:41:53 31TM8630_045
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
TOC children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
SUN VISORS
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
40
2013 Insight
DASHBOARD
12/07/13 16:42:01 31TM8630_046
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
If a Child Requires
Close Attention
Many parents say they prefer to
put an infant or a small child in the
front passenger seat so they can
watch the child, or because the
child requires attention.
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 52 ).
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with
Several Children
TOC Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 141 ).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 18 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see
page 17 ).
2013 Insight
41
12/07/13 16:42:09 31TM8630_047
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
TOC
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
Driver and Passenger Safety
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 49 and 50 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
adult supervision is illegal in most
states, Canadian provinces and
territories, and can be very
hazardous.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in
a crash.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 134 ).
42
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
2013 Insight
Lock all doors and the hatch when
your vehicle is not in use. Children
who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside the
vehicle. Teach your children not to
play in or around vehicles.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the
ignition switch, and open the
hatch, which can lead to
accidental injury or death.
12/07/13 16:42:19 31TM8630_048
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put \
a rear-facing child seat in the
front seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
43
12/07/13 16:42:28 31TM8630_049
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
TOC the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
crash.
Child Seat Placement
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
44
and weight are appropriate for a
rear-facing seat.
Many states, Canadian provinces and
territories allow a child one year of
age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height
2013 Insight
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
12/07/13 16:42:35 31TM8630_050
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
TOC passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 35 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCHcompatible (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren). Some have a
rigid-type connector, while others
have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some
existing and previously owned child
seats can only be installed using the
seat belt. Whichever type you
choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care
instructions as well as the
instructions in this manual. Proper
installation is key to maximizing your
child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using the seat belt and a top tether
for added security. This is because
all child seats are required to be
designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a
lap/shoulder belt.
In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat
belt be used to attach a LATCHcompatible seat once a child reaches
a specified weight. Please read the
child seat owner’s manual for proper
installation instructions.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
2013 Insight
45
12/07/13 16:42:43 31TM8630_051
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important considerations when
selecting a child seat
TOC Make sure the child seat meets the
following three requirements:
The child seat is the correct type
and size for the child.
The child seat is the correct type
for the seating position.
The child seat is compliant with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
46
2013 Insight
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
12/07/13 16:42:53 31TM8630_052
Installing a Child Seat
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for a rearfacing child seat.
Installing a Child
Seat with LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at the outer
rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only
with a child seat designed for use
with LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
You can find lower anchors in the
slits in the seat-backs.
BUTTON
LOWER ANCHORS
To install a LATCH-compatible
child seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle
or tongue away from the
lower anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat
and the anchors.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
47
12/07/13 16:43:01 31TM8630_053
Installing a Child Seat
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
Rigid type
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
48
Flexible type
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector
as shown above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
2013 Insight
ANCHOR
5. Lift the head restraint (see page
142 ), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seatback, making sure the
strap is not twisted.
12/07/13 16:43:09 31TM8630_054
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
TOC
seat maker.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
49
12/07/13 16:43:16 31TM8630_055
Installing a Child Seat
TOC
Driver and Passenger Safety
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into
the retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
50
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
2013 Insight
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal
driving maneuvers. If the
child seat is not secure, unlatch
the belt, allow it to retract fully,
then repeat these steps.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
12/07/13 16:43:24 31TM8630_056
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat
with a Tether
TOC
Outer Position
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Center Position TETHER STRAP HOOK
Driver and Passenger Safety
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
ANCHORAGE POINTS
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using
a tether whenever one is required
or available.
ANCHOR
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 49 ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
2013 Insight
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
51
12/07/13 16:43:31 31TM8630_057
Protecting Larger Children
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Driver and Passenger Safety
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
TOC for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear the lap/
shoulder belt.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
To determine if a lap/shoulder
belt properly fits a child, have the
child put on the seat belt,
then ask yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of
the seat?
52
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:43:40 31TM8630_058
Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
TOC
Using a Booster Seat
laws in the states, provinces or
territories where you intend to drive.
Driver and Passenger Safety
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see
page 46 ) and that you follow the
booster seat maker’s instructions.
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible, and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states, Canadian provinces and
territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
2013 Insight
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
53
12/07/13 16:43:50 31TM8630_059
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
When Can a Larger
Child Sit in Front
TOC The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 17 and 52 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body
is in the path of a deploying side
airbag, the child could receive
possibly serious injuries.
54
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
2013 Insight
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s
manual, and make sure you
understand all seat belt instructions
and all safety information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
12/07/13 16:43:55 31TM8630_060
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
TOC
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
Driver and Passenger Safety
in serious neck injuries during
a crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and
be injured.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in
a crash.
2013 Insight
55
12/07/13 16:44:03 31TM8630_061
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
TOC monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
The vehicle is raised for an
oil change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a crash that
may have damaged the underside.
56
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
2013 Insight
With the hatch open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
hatch open, open all the windows,
and set the climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
12/07/13 16:44:17 31TM8630_062
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
TOC hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
U.S. models only
U.S. models
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
Canadian models
RADIATOR CAP
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
57
12/07/13 16:44:25 31TM8630_063
Safety Labels
TOC
DOORJAMBS
Driver and Passenger Safety
U.S. models
58
2013 Insight
Canadian models
12/07/13 16:44:30 31TM8630_064
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 60
Instrument Panel ............................. 61
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 62
Gauges .............................................. 72
Multi-Information Display .............. 75
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel .......................................... 118
Windshield Wipers and
Washers ...................................... 119
Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 120
Daytime Running Lights .......... 123
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 124
Hazard Warning Button ................ 125
Rear Window Defogger ................ 126
ECON Button ................................. 127
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 128
Keys and Locks.............................. 129
Immobilizer System....................... 130
Ignition Switch ............................... 131
Door Locks ..................................... 133
Childproof Door Locks ............. 134
Remote Transmitter ...................... 135
Hatch ............................................... 139
Unlocking the Hatch ................. 140
Seats ................................................ 141
Front Seat Adjustments ............ 141
2013 Insight
Driver’s Seat Height
Adjustment ............................. 141
Head Restraints ......................... 142
Folding the Rear Seats Down .. 145
Armrest ....................................... 146
Mirrors ............................................ 147
Adjusting the Power Mirrors ... 147
Power Mirror Heaters............... 148
Power Windows ............................. 149
Parking Brake ................................ 151
Interior Convenience Items .......... 152
Under Floor Storage ................ 153
Floor Storage Compartments .. 153
Beverage Holders ...................... 154
Accessory Power Socket .......... 155
Console Compartment .............. 155
Glove Box ................................... 156
Center Tray ................................ 156
Center Pockets........................... 157
Coat Hook ................................... 158
Sun Visors ................................... 158
Vanity Mirror ............................. 158
Interior Lights ................................ 159
59
12/07/13 16:44:36 31TM8630_065
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.62)
GAUGES (P.72)
TOC
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
(P.72, P.75)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.147)
Instruments and Controls
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*2
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.168)
ECON BUTTON
(P.127)
DOOR LOCK TAB
(P.133)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.35)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.133)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.162)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.149)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
(P.271)
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
(P.151)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.248)
PADDLE SHIFTERS*1
(P.276)
EX model with navigation system is shown.
* 1 : If equipped
* 2 : Refer to the navigation system manual.
60
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P.125)
2013 Insight
USB ADAPTER CABLE*1
(P.197, P.205)
12/07/23 10:21:03 31TM8630_066
Instrument Panel
TOC
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
(AMBER) (P.64)
Instruments and Controls
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.65, P.293)
VSA OFF INDICATOR
(P.65, P.293)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.67)
(ABS) INDICATOR (P.64)
LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.67)
HIGH BEAM
SYSTEM MESSAGE
INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P.70)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR* (P.69)
(P.69)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.69)
ECON MODE INDICATOR (P.71)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR*
(P.70)
DOOR/HATCH OPEN
INDICATOR (P.68)
IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.63)
IMA SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.66)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.62, P.365)
12 VOLT BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.63, P.364)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.62, P.363)
* : If equipped
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
INDICATOR (P.68)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.65)
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR
(P.66, P.281, P.283)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.70)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
LOW TIRE PRESSURE/
TPMS INDICATOR* (P.66) INDICATOR (P.62)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (RED)
(P.63, P.366)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR (P.64)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR* (P.69)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
2013 Insight
61
12/07/13 16:44:54 31TM8630_067
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals, and you
will see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or
‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 21 .
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
62
2013 Insight
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 365 .
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running, and you
will see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL
LEVEL’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 363 .
12/07/13 16:45:03 31TM8630_068
Instrument Panel Indicators
12 Volt Battery Charging
System Indicator
Instruments and Controls
If this indicator comes on when the
TOC engine is running, the 12 volt battery
is not being charged, and you will
also see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 364 .
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page 130 ).
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
This indicator has two functions:
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. Driving with
the parking brake not fully
released can damage the brakes
and tires.
2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, it can
indicate a problem in the brake
system. You will also see a
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. For more information, see
page 366 .
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 151 ).
2013 Insight
63
12/07/13 16:45:12 31TM8630_069
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
TOC
Canada
Instruments and Controls
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and START (III) position.
When the brake system indicator
(amber) comes on and stays on,
there is a problem with the Creep
Aid System or Brake Assist (the
normal brake operates properly).
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer. For more information, see
page 285 .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 89 ).
64
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page 287 .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 89 ).
2013 Insight
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
airbag system components. For
more information, see page 34 .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display
(see page 89 ).
12/07/13 16:45:23 31TM8630_070
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
TOC
Canada
Instruments and Controls
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. You will also
see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG
OFF’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 34 .
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator has two functions:
1. It flashes when VSA is active
(see page 293 ).
2. If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the VSA or hill start assist system.
Take your vehicle to a dealer to
have it checked. Without VSA,
your vehicle still has normal
driving ability, but will not have
VSA traction and stability
enhancement. See page 293
for more information on the
VSA system.
2013 Insight
If the VSA indicator illuminates, hill
start assist will not be working.
Without hill start assist, the vehicle
will roll downhill immediately when
you release the brake on an incline.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ or ‘‘CHECK HILL START
ASSIST SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see
page 90 ).
VSA OFF Indicator
It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle stability
assist (VSA) system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page 293 .
65
12/07/13 16:45:34 31TM8630_071
Instrument Panel Indicators
IMA System Indicator
TOC
Instruments and Controls
This indicator normally comes on
for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates a
problem in the integrated motor
assist (IMA) system. With the IMA
indicator on, the vehicle may not
accelerate as it normally does. Have
the vehicle checked by the dealer
as soon as possible.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK IMA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
U.S. models only
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator has two functions:
1. If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 289 ).
Auto Idle Stop Indicator
See pages 281 and 283 .
66
2013 Insight
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 349 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service.
Refer to page 374 for more
information.
2. If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see
page 290 .
12/07/13 16:45:42 31TM8630_072
Instrument Panel Indicators
TOC
Instruments and Controls
High Temperature
Indicator
This indicator shows the
temperature of the engine coolant. It
normally comes on when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and goes off after a few
seconds. In normal driving
conditions, this indicator should not
blink or stay on. In severe driving
conditions, such as very hot weather
or a long period of uphill driving, this
indicator may blink. This means the
engine coolant temperature is high.
If the indicator begins to blink while
you are driving, be sure to slow down
to prevent overheating. If the
indicator stays on, pull safely to the
side of the road and turn off the
engine. See page 360 for instructions
and precautions on checking the
engine’s cooling system.
Low Temperature
Indicator
This indicator shows the
temperature of the engine coolant. If
there is no problem, this indicator
comes on when the engine is cold. If
it comes on when the engine is warm
(normal operating temperature),
have the vehicle inspected by your
dealer as soon as possible.
If the indicator begins to blink or
stays on, you will also see a ‘‘WATER
TEMP HOT’’ message on the multiinformation display. This warning
will alert you that the engine should
be cooled down.
Do not drive the vehicle while the
indicator is on or the engine may be
damaged.
2013 Insight
67
12/07/13 16:45:49 31TM8630_073
Instrument Panel Indicators
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and goes off
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, there is a problem
in the electric power steering system.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will stay on,
but should go off after driving a
short distance. If it does not go off,
or comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be turned off,
making the vehicle harder to steer.
68
If you turn the steering wheel to the
full left or right position repeatedly
while stopping or driving at very low
speed, you may feel slightly harder
steering in order to prevent damage
to the steering system caused by
overheating. This may also happen if
you hold the steering wheel on the
full left or right position for a while.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER
STEERING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
2013 Insight
Door/Hatch Open
Indicator
This indicator comes on red if
any door or the hatch lid is not
closed tightly.
You will also see a corresponding
indicator(s) on the multi-information
display to indicate which door and/
or the hatch is not closed tightly (see
page 12 ).
12/07/13 16:45:59 31TM8630_074
Instrument Panel Indicators
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages 325 and 327 ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
High Beam Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
On LX and EX models
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page 222 ).
Cruise Control Indicator
On LX and EX models
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
222 for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 121 .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page 123 ).
2013 Insight
69
12/07/13 16:46:08 31TM8630_075
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Fuel Indicator
TOC
Instruments and Controls
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
System Message
Indicator
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multiinformation display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page 76 ) to see the message (see
page 89 ).
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comes on as a reminder that you
must refuel soon. You will also see a
‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display.
On LX and EX models
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page 221 .
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 1.8 U.S. gal (6.9 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
When the needle reaches E, there
is a very small amount of
fuel in the tank.
70
Security System Indicator
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:46:12 31TM8630_076
Instrument Panel Indicators
ECON Mode Indicator
TOC
Instruments and Controls
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. When you turn the econ
mode on by pressing the ECON
button with the ignition switch in the
ON (II) position, this indicator will
come on.
You will also see the symbol on the
multi-information display with ECON
ON or ECON OFF (see page 75 ).
2013 Insight
71
12/07/13 16:46:18 31TM8630_077
Gauges
Speedometer/Ambient Meter
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per hour
(mph) depending on the selected
speedometer display. You can switch
the display between km/h and mph
(see page 73 ).
SPEEDOMETER/AMBIENT METER
TOC
Instruments and Controls
CHARGE/ASSIST GAUGE
TACHOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
The speedometer also has an
ambient meter. The color of the
ambient meter changes
automatically according to your
driving style (see page 266 ).
You can customize the setting of the
ambient meter (see page 103 ).
KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
SEL/RESET KNOB
U.S. model is shown.
72
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:46:26 31TM8630_078
Gauges
Sel/Reset Knob
Km/Mile Change Knob
TOC
To switch the lower segment of the
multi-information display between
the odometer with the outside
temperature and trip meter with the
outside temperature, press the sel/
reset knob repeatedly. For more
information, see page 78 .
KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Each time you press and hold the
km/mile change knob, the
speedometer reading switches
between miles per hour (mph) and
kilometers per hour (km/h).
2013 Insight
73
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
SEL/RESET KNOB
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
12/07/13 16:46:32 31TM8630_079
Gauges
Charge/Assist Gauge
IMA ASSIST GAUGE
TOC
Instruments and Controls
IMA CHARGE GAUGE
This gauge shows you the charge/
discharge status of the Integrated
Motor Assist (IMA). When the IMA
is assisting the engine, the pointer
stays in the assist gauge (upper part
of the gauge). When the IMA
battery is being charged, the pointer
stays in the charge gauge (lower part
of the gauge).
74
You can also check the status of the
IMA system function on the multiinformation display (see page 84 ).
If the IMA battery is too hot or too
cold, the IMA system limits the IMA
battery’s output power to protect the
battery. This disables the IMA assist
and auto idle stop, even though the
battery level indicator on the multiinformation display may show that
the battery is well-charged (see ~~~~
page 85 ). Therefore, if the motor
assist is frequently used, the
battery becomes hot and starts to
limit its output power.
It takes a short time to normalize the
IMA battery’s output power
depending on the weather.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:46:40 31TM8630_080
Multi-Information Display
TOC
Instruments and Controls
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably. Others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your vehicle needs for
continued trouble-free driving.
There are three types of messages:
normal display messages, engine oil
life and maintenance messages, and
system messages.
You can select the displayed
language and also customize some
vehicle control settings to your liking
with the multi-information display
and the three buttons on the steering
wheel (see page 76 ).
Normal Display Messages
ECON is On.
ECON is Off.
You will see an ‘‘ECON ON’’ or
‘‘ECON OFF’’ message on the multiinformation display according to the
previous ECON setting when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (see page 127 ).
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
you will see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display when
you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
These messages go off several
seconds after the key is inserted into
the ignition switch.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
75
12/07/13 16:46:46 31TM8630_081
Multi-Information Display
INFO BUTTONS (▲/▼)
SEL/RESET BUTTON
SEL/RESET BUTTON
LX and EX models
INFO (▲/▼) BUTTON
Insight model
TOC
Instruments and Controls
U.S. model is shown.
The multi-information display
changes to the blank display shown
above several seconds after
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.
76
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the multi-information
display changes as shown on page 78
each time you press the INFO
(▲/▼) button or SEL/RESET
button.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:46:52 31TM8630_082
Multi-Information Display
TOC
In the multi-information display, the
system message is also displayed
(see page 88 ) and you can
customize your vehicle control
settings (see page 91 ).
MIDDLE
SEGMENT
Instruments and Controls
U.S. model is shown.
UPPER
SEGMENT
In the normal display mode, the
upper and middle segments display
trip computer information, such as
fuel economy or average speed. The
lower segment displays the
odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside
temperature, and engine oil life and
maintenance item code(s).
LOWER
SEGMENT
The multi-information display
consists of an upper segment, a
middle segment and a lower
segment.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
77
12/07/13 16:46:58 31TM8630_083
Multi-Information Display
HFL* (See page 87)
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Ecological
Average Fuel
Drive Display Economy Record
(See page 81) (See page 81)
Trip Computer (See page 81)
Engine Oil Life
(See page 80)
Outside Temperature
(See page 80)
: Press the INFO button ▼.
: Press the INFO button ▲.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
U.S. model is shown.
78
* : This display will be shown when the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.
2013 Insight
IMA System Power
Flow Monitor/
IMA Battery Level
Indicator
(See page 84, 85)
12/07/13 16:47:08 31TM8630_084
Multi-Information Display
Odometer
TOC
U.S.
Trip Meter
Canada
TRIP METER A
TRIP METER B
When you reset Trip A, average fuel
economy A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.
Instruments and Controls
In the customizing mode, you can set
Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset when you refuel your vehicle
(see page 99 ).
ODOMETER
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
U.S. model is shown.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it,
then press and hold the SEL/
RESET button until the number
resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
2013 Insight
79
12/07/13 16:47:16 31TM8630_085
Multi-Information Display
Outside Temperature
U.S.
TOC
Canada
Instruments and Controls
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Celsius temperature in Canadian
models.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
Engine Oil Life
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
This shows the remaining engine oil
life. It shows 100% after the engine
oil is replaced and the display is reset.
The engine oil life is calculated
based on engine operating conditions.
For more information, see page 299 .
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 98 ).
80
2013 Insight
ENGINE OIL LIFE
12/07/13 16:47:28 31TM8630_086
Multi-Information Display
Ecological Drive Display
ECO-DRIVE SCORE DISPLAY
Average Fuel Economy Records
U.S.
Canada
LATEST
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY
TOC
Trip Computer
Indicators in the trip computer show:
Average Fuel Economy
Instruments and Controls
Instant Fuel Economy
Range
Elapsed Time
Average Vehicle Speed
DECELERATION
MONITOR
ACCELERATION
MONITOR
U.S. model is shown.
Ecological drive display consists of
three parts. The eco-drive score
display shows the accumulated
eco score for one driving cycle.
The acceleration monitor shows
acceleration efficiency. The deceleration monitor shows deceleration
efficiency. See page 265 for
more information.
PAST AVERAGE
FUEL ECONOMY
The average fuel economy records
display shows the average fuel
economy (0) for the current driving
cycle and (1-3) for the last three
driving cycles in mpg (U.S. models)
or l/100 km (Canadian models).
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
81
12/07/13 16:47:40 31TM8630_087
Multi-Information Display
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy A/B
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY A
TOC
Instruments and Controls
INSTANT
FUEL
ECONOMY
Canada
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY B
Mile indication (U.S. models):
Average Fuel Economy A:
This shows your vehicle’s instant
fuel economy in mpg.
Kilometer indication (Canadian models):
This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or l/100 km (Canadian models) since
you last reset trip computer A.
This shows your vehicle’s instant
fuel economy in l/100 km.
Average Fuel Economy B:
When you turn off the engine, the
instant fuel economy (mpg or
1/100 km) is also reset.
This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or l/100 km (Canadian models) since
you last reset trip computer B.
82
2013 Insight
The average fuel economy will be
reset when you reset the trip meter,
or if the vehicle’s 12 volt battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
You can customize the Trip A and
Average Fuel Economy A reset
condition on the multi-information
display (see page 99 ).
12/07/13 16:47:48 31TM8630_088
Multi-Information Display
TOC
Instruments and Controls
RANGE
ELAPSED TIME
AVG. SPEED
This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.
This shows the accumulated
traveling time since you last reset it.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, ELAPSED
TIME is reset.
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
If you want to reset the ELAPSED
TIME manually, go to the trip
computer’s ELAPSED TIME display,
and press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets.
To reset the AVG. SPEED reading,
press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets.
You can customize the ELAPSED
TIME reset conditions on the multiinformation display (see page 100 ).
2013 Insight
83
12/07/13 16:47:57 31TM8630_089
Multi-Information Display
IMA System Power Flow Monitor
POWER FLOW
TOC
Powering Status
The table in the next column shows
the basic monitoring display
examples and their descriptions.
Instruments and Controls
ENGINE
OPERATION
ICON
IMA motor is assisting the
engine with powering the
vehicle. IMA battery is
discharging and the system
is consuming fuel.
IMA system is charging
IMA battery.
IMA BATTERY/BATTERY
LEVEL INDICATOR
The IMA system power flow monitor
shows the status of the IMA system.
The energy source, and powering
status of the engine and IMA motor
(engine operation icon and IMA
battery) are represented by arrows
on the display. The battery level
indicator shows the state of charge
of the IMA battery.
84
Descriptions
Only IMA motor is
powering the vehicle and
IMA battery is discharging.
Only engine is powering
vehicle. The system is
consuming fuel.
Engine is powering vehicle
and IMA system is charging
IMA battery. The system is
consuming fuel.
2013 Insight
Example
12/07/13 16:48:04 31TM8630_090
Multi-Information Display
IMA Battery Level Indicator
IMA BATTERY LEVEL INDICATOR
Level 0
TOC
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Instruments and Controls
Lowest
level of
state of
charge
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
Highest
level of
state of
charge
LEVEL READING
The IMA battery level indicator
shows you the state of charge of
the battery for the Integrated
Motor Assist (IMA). This battery is
recharged and discharged by the
IMA motor depending on the
driving conditions.
The position of the battery level
reading shows the state of charge of
the IMA battery. When the battery
level reading is high, the IMA
battery is well charged. There are
seven positions (Level 0-Level 6) of
the battery level reading.
The battery level reading may drop
near the bottom under driving
conditions that require IMA motor
assistance for a long time, such as
prolonged acceleration or climbing a
long hill.
The IMA motor will recharge the
battery as you continue driving.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
85
12/07/13 16:48:12 31TM8630_091
Multi-Information Display
On vehicle with paddle shifters
TOC
The IMA battery is charged at a
higher rate when the transmission is
in L (Low) mode (see page 280 ).
Instruments and Controls
On vehicle without paddle shifters
The IMA battery is charged at a
higher rate when the transmission is
in LOW (L) range (see page 274 ).
If the battery is mostly discharged,
the auto idle stop function is disabled
(see page 281 ).
Since the level is not read directly,
small sensing errors can, over time,
cause the gauge to read higher
than the actual battery level. The
system will then perform a
correction, and the battery level
gauge reading will drop suddenly.
When this happens, IMA assist
and Auto Idle Stop are disabled
until the IMA battery is sufficiently
recharged by normal driving.
The battery level gauge does not
read the battery level directly. It
calculates the level by continuously
measuring the current flow, voltage,
and temperature.
86
2013 Insight
This correction of the battery level
gauge is normal and does not
indicate a problem. If the IMA
battery develops a problem or
becomes deteriorated, the IMA
system indicator will come on. If this
happens, have the vehicle checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
12/07/13 16:48:16 31TM8630_092
Multi-Information Display
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
TOC
Instruments and Controls
To use the system, your cell phone
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page 225
for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to HFL and how to
receive or make phone calls, or visit
the handsfreelink.com website. In
Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or
call (888) 528-7876.
You can receive or make phone calls
from your cell phone through your
vehicle’s Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(HFL) system without touching your
cell phone.
2013 Insight
87
12/07/13 16:48:24 31TM8630_093
Multi-Information Display
System Messages
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
TOC
Instruments and Controls
The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the
first time.
If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
88
Most of the messages are displayed
for about 5 seconds, and then the
normal display returns. If there are
several system messages to be
shown, the display switches these
messages every 5 seconds.
2013 Insight
To switch the message(s) before 5
seconds have elapsed, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button on the steering
wheel.
Even if you press the INFO (▲/▼)
button, some messages stay on or
come on again at regular intervals
until the problem is corrected.
If the system message indicator
remains lit on the instrument panel,
you can see the corresponding
message(s) again by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.
A list of all messages begins on the
next page:
12/07/13 16:48:38 31TM8630_094
Multi-Information Display
See page
12
TOC
U.S.
See page
366
Instruments and Controls
See page
34
Canada
See page
13
See page
365
See page
13
See page
151
See page
364
See page
21
See page
319
See page
287
See page
21
U.S.
See page
363
See page
64
Canada
See page
34
See page
66
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
89
12/07/13 16:48:51 31TM8630_095
Multi-Information Display
See page
123
See page
68
See page
300
See page
289
See page
131
See page
301
See page
290
See page
131
See page
302
See page
360
See page
132
See page
247
See page
317
See page
80
See page
293
TOC
Instruments and Controls
See page
70
U.S.
only
U.S.
only
See page
271
90
Canada
only
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:48:58 31TM8630_096
Multi-Information Display
Customized Settings
TOC
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.
Instruments and Controls
If you try to enter the customizing
mode while the vehicle is moving,
you will see a ‘‘MUST STOP AND
SHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGE
SETTINGS’’ message and you
cannot change the settings.
If you want to change any vehicle
control settings, select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Refer to the table on the following
pages about the settings you want
to customize.
You can customize some vehicle
control settings. To enter the
customizing mode, press and hold
either INFO button (▲/▼) for more
than 3 seconds. To change the
settings, the ignition switch must be
in the ON (II) position, and the
vehicle must be stopped with the
transmission in Park.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
91
12/07/13 16:49:03 31TM8630_097
Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
METER SETUP
(P.96)
TOC
Instruments and Controls
LIGHTING SETUP
(P.104)
Menu Item
LANGUAGE SELECTION
Description
Changes the language used in the display.
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
Changes the outside temperature reading above or
below its current reading.
TRIP A RESET with
REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME RESET
Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy
to reset when you refuel.
Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.
DISPLAY KM/MILES
Changes the displayed measurement on the multiinformation display.
METER COLOR CHANGE
Turn the ambient meter feature on or off.
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY
Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights
stay on after you close the doors.
Changes the timing of when the headlights come
on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO
position.
* : Default setting
92
2013 Insight
Setting Option
ENGLISH*
FRENCH
SPANISH
−5°F ∼ ±0°F* ∼ 5°F
(U.S.)
−3°C ∼ ±0°C* ∼ 3°C
(Canada)
ON
OFF*
TRIP B
IGN OFF*
TRIP A
AUTO*
KM
MILES
ON*
OFF
15sec
60sec
30sec*
LOW
MAX
MIN
HIGH
MID*
Page
97
98
99
100
101
103
105
106
12/07/13 16:49:09 31TM8630_098
Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
DOOR SETUP
(P.108)
TOC
Menu Item
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
Instruments and Controls
DOOR LOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
DEFAULT ALL
(P.117)
*:
Description
Changes when the doors automatically lock.
Changes when the doors automatically unlock.
Changes which doors unlock with the remote
transmitter in a first push.
The exterior lights flash each time you press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the
doors to relock and the security system to set after
you unlock but do not open the door.
Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.
Setting Option
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEH SPD*
OFF
SHIFT TO P*
DRIVER DOOR*/
IGN OFF
ALL DOORS
OFF
DRIVER DOOR *
ALL DOORS
ON*
OFF
90sec
60sec
30sec*
SET
CANCEL
Page
109
110
112
114
115
117
Default setting
2013 Insight
93
12/07/13 16:49:17 31TM8630_099
Multi-Information Display
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown on the next page. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Customize Settings
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:
METER SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
If you do not make any changes,
select ‘‘EXIT.’’ The display returns to
the normal display.
DOOR SETUP
When you want to change the
vehicle control settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
94
2013 Insight
You can also use the select/reset
knob in the instrument panel. Turn
the knob to select a setting and press
it to enter your selection.
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page 117 .
12/07/13 16:49:23 31TM8630_100
Multi-Information Display
NORMAL DISPLAY
U.S.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
METER SETUP
See page 96
Canada
LIGHTING SETUP
See page 104
DOOR SETUP
See page 108
: Press and hold the INFO (▲/▼) button.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button ▼.
: Press the INFO button ▲.
2013 Insight
95
12/07/13 16:49:34 31TM8630_101
Multi-Information Display
TOC
Meter Setup
Here are the four custom settings
for the meter setup:
LANGUAGE SELECTION
Instruments and Controls
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A RESET with REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME RESET
DISPLAY KM/MILES
See page 97
See page 98
See page 99
See page
100
METER COLOR CHANGE
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
96
See page 103
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button ▼.
: Press the INFO button ▲.
2013 Insight
See page 101
12/07/13 16:49:42 31TM8630_102
Multi-Information Display
Language Selection
TOC
Instruments and Controls
There are three language selections
you can make: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired language by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
97
12/07/13 16:49:51 31TM8630_103
Multi-Information Display
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models
Canadian models
TOC
Instruments and Controls
If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:
Adjust the outside temperature value
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET
button to set the desired value.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the setting.
98
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:49:59 31TM8630_104
Multi-Information Display
Trip A Reset With Refuel
TOC
Instruments and Controls
To cause Trip A and average fuel for
trip A to reset every time you refuel
your vehicle, follow these
instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
A RESET with REFUEL’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
99
12/07/13 16:50:06 31TM8630_105
Multi-Information Display
Elapsed Time Reset
There are three elapsed time reset
choices you can make:
TOC
Instruments and Controls
IGN OFF − The elapsed time is
reset when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
TRIP A − The elapsed time is reset
when Trip A is reset.
TRIP B − The elapsed time is reset
when Trip B is reset.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button repeatedly.
100
2013 Insight
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
12/07/13 16:50:13 31TM8630_106
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
Display Km/Miles
To change the displayed
measurement in the trip computer
and trip information and to switch
between kilometers and miles, follow
these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button repeatedly.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
101
12/07/13 16:50:20 31TM8630_107
Multi-Information Display
AUTO: When you press the km/mile
change knob in the instrument panel
to switch the speedometer reading
between miles per hour (mph) and
kilometers per hour (km/h), the
displayed measurement in the trip
computer and trip information, also
switches to kilometers or miles
depending on the selected
speedometer reading.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select AUTO, KM, or MILES by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
102
KM: The displayed measurement in
the trip computer and trip
information is set to kilometers.
MILES: The displayed measurement
in the trip computer and trip
information is set to miles.
2013 Insight
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
If the ‘‘DISPLAY KM/MILES
SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back
to ‘‘DISPLAY KM/ MILES’’
and repeat the procedure again.
12/07/13 16:50:27 31TM8630_108
Multi-Information Display
Meter Color Change
TOC
Instruments and Controls
You can turn the ambient meter
feature on or off (see page 72 ).
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
2013 Insight
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
If the ‘‘METER COLOR CHANGE
SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ message
appears, go back to ‘‘METER
COLOR CHANGE’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
103
12/07/13 16:50:35 31TM8630_109
Multi-Information Display
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Lighting Setup
There is one custom setting for the
lighting setup:
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
See page
105
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
See page
106
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button ▼.
: Press the INFO button ▲.
104
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:50:43 31TM8630_110
Multi-Information Display
Interior Light Dimming Time
TOC
Instruments and Controls
The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors. To change how long
the lights stay on before they fade
out, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (15sec,
30sec, or 60sec) by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
105
12/07/13 16:50:51 31TM8630_111
Multi-Information Display
Auto Light Sensitivity
TOC
Instruments and Controls
The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
HIGH −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat bright.
MID −
The headlights come on when it is as
bright as sunset or sunrise.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button repeatedly.
LOW −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat dark.
MIN −
The headlights come on when it is
dark.
106
2013 Insight
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (MAX,
HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
12/07/13 16:50:56 31TM8630_112
Multi-Information Display
TOC
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
2013 Insight
107
12/07/13 16:51:05 31TM8630_113
Multi-Information Display
TOC
Door Setup
Here are the five custom settings for
the door setup:
AUTO DOOR LOCK
Instruments and Controls
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
See page
109
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
See page
110
See page
112
While ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO
(▲/▼) button, the screen changes
as shown in the illustration. Press
the INFO ( ▲/ ▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
108
See page
115
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button ▼.
: Press the INFO button ▲.
2013 Insight
See page
114
12/07/13 16:51:14 31TM8630_114
Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Lock
There are three settings you can
choose from:
TOC
Instruments and Controls
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEHICLE SPEED −
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
16 km/h).
OFF −
The auto door lock mode is
deactivated all the time.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
109
12/07/13 16:51:19 31TM8630_115
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
TOC
Auto Door Unlock
There are five possible settings you
can choose from:
Instruments and Controls
DRIVER DOOR WITH SHIFT TO P
− The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to Park with
the brake pedal depressed.
ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TO P −
All the doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to Park with the brake
pedal depressed.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
110
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:51:27 31TM8630_116
Multi-Information Display
TOC
DRIVER DOOR WITH IGN OFF −
The driver’s door unlocks when you
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
(0) position.
Instruments and Controls
ALL DOORS WITH IGN OFF − All
the doors unlock when you turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position.
OFF − The auto door unlock is
deactivated all the time.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( ▲/ ▼)
button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button.
For example, you choose ‘‘DRIVER
DOOR with SHIFT to P,’’ you will
see the above display.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
111
12/07/13 16:51:35 31TM8630_117
Multi-Information Display
Door Lock Mode
TOC
Instruments and Controls
If you choose ‘‘ALL
DOORS With IGN OFF,’’
you will see the above display.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.
112
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
2013 Insight
To select whether the driver’s or all
doors unlock when you unlock the
doors with the remote transmitter or
the key, follow these instructions.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button repeatedly.
12/07/13 16:51:40 31TM8630_118
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘DOOR
LOCK MODE’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
2013 Insight
113
12/07/13 16:51:46 31TM8630_119
Multi-Information Display
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
TOC
Instruments and Controls
When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the hatch
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 221 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
114
2013 Insight
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
12/07/13 16:51:53 31TM8630_120
Multi-Information Display
Security Relock Timer
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
any of the doors within 30 seconds,
the doors and the hatch,
automatically relock, and the
security system sets.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
115
12/07/13 16:51:58 31TM8630_121
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
116
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customizable item screen.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:52:05 31TM8630_122
Multi-Information Display
DEFAULT ALL
TOC
Instruments and Controls
If you want to set the default settings,
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
select DEFAULT ALL, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
To set the default settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select SET
then press the SEL/RESET button.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to the previous display.
2013 Insight
When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen returns to
the default all setting display.
If the setting is not successfully
completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
several seconds, and then the
screen goes back to SETUP. Repeat
the same procedure to select
DEFAULT ALL.
117
12/07/13 16:52:13 31TM8630_123
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB
(P.124)
TOC
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS*2 (P.222)
MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS*2 (P.76)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.119)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.120)
Instruments and Controls
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.147)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*3/
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.168)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROL BUTTONS*2
(P.217)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR*2
(P.126, P.148)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) OFF
SWITCH
(P.294)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
(P.155)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS*3
BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE LINK
SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS*2 (P.225)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.218)
HORN*1
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS(P.128)
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS*2 (P.76)
EX model with navigation system is shown.
* 1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
* 2 : If equipped
* 3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
118
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:52:21 31TM8630_124
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
ADJUSTMENT RING
INT − The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle’s speed.
Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
EX model is shown.
1. MIST
EX models
2. OFF
3. INT
−
Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
The length of the wiper interval is
varied automatically according to the
vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay (
position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
2013 Insight
119
12/07/13 16:52:31 31TM8630_125
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signals and Headlights
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
3. Hold past ON to activate the rear
window wiper a few times and to
spray the rear window washer.
Turn Signals and Headlights
4. Rotate the switch counterclockwise
also to spray the window washer
and turn the wiper on.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
When you shift the transmission to
the reverse position with the front
windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.
1. OFF
When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer.
1. Turn Signal
2. OFF
3. Parking and interior lights
4. AUTO*
2. Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
The wiper operates every 7
seconds after completing
two sweeps.
5. Headlights on
6. High Beams
7. Flash high beams
* : EX models
120
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:52:38 31TM8630_126
Turn Signals and Headlights
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal − Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Headlights − Turning the switch to
the ‘‘
’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights.
High Beams − Push the left lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will come
on (see page 69 ). Pull the lever back
to return to the low beams.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as
a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
If you leave the lights on with
the key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the
driver’s door.
2013 Insight
121
12/07/13 16:52:44 31TM8630_127
Headlights
On EX models
TOC
Instruments and Controls
AUTO − The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights, all
other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights when it
senses low ambient light.
To turn on the automatic lighting,
turn the light switch to the AUTO
position. The lights will come on
automatically when the outside light
level becomes low (at dusk, for
example). The lights on indicator
comes on as a reminder. The lights
and indicator turn off automatically
when the system senses high
ambient light.
Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
that you turn on the lights
manually when driving at night or
in a dense fog, or when you enter
dark areas such as long tunnels or
parking facilities.
To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see
page 106 .
LIGHT SENSOR
The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
The lights turn off automatically
when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position. To turn them
on again, either turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, or
turn the light switch to the
position.
122
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:52:49 31TM8630_128
Headlights
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch off or in
the
position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
2013 Insight
123
12/07/13 16:52:56 31TM8630_129
Instrument Panel Brightness
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to the
or
position. Turning the
knob to the right until you hear a
tone will cancel the reduced
brightness.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
The knob on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. Turn the
knob to adjust the brightness with
the ignition switch in the ON (II)
position and the parking lights on.
124
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
When you turn the knob, the multiinformation display changes to
vertical bars that show you the
current level.
You will hear a tone when you reach
the maximum or minimum
brightness. The brightness level
goes out about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting.
2013 Insight
The instrument panel will
illuminate with reduced brightness
when you unlock and open the
driver’s door. The brightness will
increase slightly when you insert
the key in the ignition switch,
then go to normal brightness when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.
12/07/13 16:53:01 31TM8630_130
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
TOC
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
Hazard Warning Button
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
Instruments and Controls
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
Push the button next to the audio
system to turn on the hazard
warning lights (four-way flashers).
This causes all four outside turn
signal lights and both turn signal
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
2013 Insight
125
12/07/13 16:53:06 31TM8630_131
Rear Window Defogger
The defogger will shut itself off
within about 10 to 30 minutes
according to the outside temperature
(over 32°F, 0°C).
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Make sure all rear windows are clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
U.S. EX model is shown.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
windows. Push the defogger button
to turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
have to turn the defogger on again
when you restart the vehicle.
126
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of all rear windows can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe sideto-side.
2013 Insight
U.S. EX models and all Canadian models
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 148 .
12/07/13 16:53:12 31TM8630_132
ECON Button
ECON MODE INDICATOR
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Press the ECON button to activate
the ECON mode. ECON ON will be
displayed on the multi-information
display and the ECON mode
indicator will illuminate in the
instrument panel. Press the ECON
button again to turn it off. ECON
OFF will appear on the multiinformation display.
When you turn off and then restart
the engine, the ECON mode setting
remains the same as previously set.
ECON BUTTON
The ECON button turns the ECON
mode on and off. The ECON mode
helps you improve your fuel
economy by modifying some
vehicle functions. When the ECON
mode is on:
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Engine performance will be
different
The climate control system will
have greater temperature
fluctuations
In addition, when the ECON mode is
on, you may get more Eco Assist
points (see page 264 ).
2013 Insight
127
12/07/13 16:53:20 31TM8630_133
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel
adjustments before you start driving.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
3. Push the lever forward fully to
lock the steering wheel in position.
Make sure the lever is positioned
securely at the bottom of the
steering column as shown.
To adjust
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
To lock
LEVER
1. Pull the lever under the steering
column toward you until it stops.
2. Move the steering wheel so it
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
128
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:53:26 31TM8630_134
Keys and Locks
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
IGNITION KEYS
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
TOC
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this number if you ever have to
get a lost key replaced. Use only
Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Instruments and Controls
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Two ignition keys come with your
vehicle. You should keep one of
them in a safe place, away from the
vehicle, as a spare.
They fit all the locks on your vehicle.
2013 Insight
129
12/07/13 16:53:33 31TM8630_135
Immobilizer System
TOC
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
Instruments and Controls
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
If you lose your key and you cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.
130
2013 Insight
This device complies with the
appropriate requirements or the
required standards. See page 392 for
more information.
12/07/13 16:53:40 31TM8630_136
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and
the accessory power sockets
in this position.
If you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position and open the driver’s door,
you will see a ‘‘RETURN IGNITION
SWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION’’
message on the multi-information
display and hear a reminder beeper.
If you turn the ignition key to the
ACCESSORY (I) position with the
driver’s door closed, you will see an
‘‘ACCESSORY (I) POSITION’’
message on the multi-information
display to inform you of the key
position.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
131
12/07/13 16:53:44 31TM8630_137
Ignition Switch
TOC
Instruments and Controls
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of
the indicators on the instrument
panel come on as a test when
you turn the ignition switch
from the ACCESSORY (I) to the
ON (II) position.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
message on the multi-information
display.
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
132
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:53:52 31TM8630_138
Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Lock
LOCK TAB
To unlock
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Unlock
You can customize the door lock/
unlock settings (see page 108 ).
To lock
To lock all doors and the hatch, push
the front of the master door lock
switch on the driver’s door, pull the
lock tab rearward on the driver’s
door, or use the key on the outside
lock on the driver’s door.
All doors and the hatch can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in the driver’s door. To unlock
only the driver’s door, insert the key,
turn it clockwise, and release it. The
remaining doors and the hatch
unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
The lock tab on each passenger’s
door locks and unlocks that door.
When the door is unlocked, you can
see the red indicator on the lock tab
above the inner door handle.
Pushing the rear of the master door
lock switch will unlock all doors and
the hatch. Pushing forward the lock
tab on the driver’s door unlocks only
that door.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
133
12/07/13 16:53:59 31TM8630_139
Door Locks
TOC
Instruments and Controls
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the
door. To lock the driver’s door,
remove the key from the ignition
switch, pull the lock tab rearward or
push the front of the master switch,
then close the door.
Default setting
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (U.S.)/15 km/h
(Canada) or more, all the doors and
the hatch lock automatically.
When you shift to P after driving, the
driver’s door unlocks.
134
Lockout Prevention
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, lockout prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With any door or the hatch
open and the key in the ignition
switch, locking with master door
lock switch is disabled. If the driver’s
door is closed, the lock tab on the
driver’s door is not disabled. Pulling
the driver’s lock tab rearward will
lock all doors and the hatch. If you
try to lock an open driver’s door by
pulling the lock tab rearward, the
driver’s door lock tab pops out and
unlocks the driver’s door.
2013 Insight
Childproof Door Locks
Unlock
Lock
LEVER
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
12/07/13 16:54:07 31TM8630_140
Remote Transmitter
LED
LOCK BUTTON
TOC
Instruments and Controls
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors and the hatch. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you press LOCK twice within 5
seconds, the horn will sounds to
verify that the doors are locked. You
cannot lock the doors if any door or
the hatch is not fully closed or if the
key is in the ignition switch.
On LX and EX models
If you press the LOCK button twice
within 5 seconds, you will hear a
horn to verify that the security
system has set.
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door (or all the
doors and the hatch depending on
the door lock setting). Press it twice
to unlock the remaining doors and
the hatch. Some exterior lights will
flash twice when you press the
button the first time.
If you do not open any door or the
hatch within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock, and the
security system (if equipped) will
reset.
The ceiling light and the door
activated spotlights come on when
you press the UNLOCK button if the
lights are in the door activated
position. If you do not open any door
or the hatch within 30 seconds (or
whatever setting of the interior light
dimming time is set to), the light(s)
will fade out. If you relock the doors
and the hatch with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light(s) will go off
immediately.
The keyless lock acknowledgment
beep and flashing of the lights can
be deactivated (see page 114 ).
To change the lock/unlock setting
and the relock timer setting, refer to
the customized settings on page 108 .
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
135
12/07/13 16:54:14 31TM8630_141
Remote Transmitter
TOC
Instruments and Controls
PANIC − Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound, and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperatures.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
136
2013 Insight
Replacing
the Transmitter Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
12/07/13 16:54:24 31TM8630_142
Remote Transmitter
COIN
KEYPAD
TOC
Instruments and Controls
BATTERY
SCREW
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
3. Place a cloth on the edge of the
keypad to prevent scratches, and
remove the upper half by carefully
prying on the edge with a coin.
NOTE: Be careful when
removing this screw as the
head of the screw can strip out.
4. Remove the old battery and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same (+ side facing down), then
insert it in the keypad.
5. Snap the two halves of the keypad,
then install the parts in reverse
order.
2. Separate the keypad from the
transmitter by pushing any button
from outside.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
137
12/07/13 16:54:28 31TM8630_143
Remote Transmitter
TOC
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
This device complies with the
appropriate requirements or the
required standards. See page 392 for
more information.
Instruments and Controls
138
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:54:33 31TM8630_144
Hatch
TOC
The hatch will lock or unlock when
you lock/unlock the driver’s door
with the key, the remote transmitter,
the master door lock switch, or the
lock tab on the driver’s door.
Instruments and Controls
To unlock the hatch, turn the key
clockwise twice, push the rear of
the master door lock switch, or
push UNLOCK twice on the
remote transmitter.
INNER HANDLE
RELEASE
To open the hatch, push the release,
and lift up. To close the hatch, use
the handle to lower it, then press
down on the back edge.
2013 Insight
Keep the hatch closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
hatch and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 56 .
139
12/07/13 16:54:39 31TM8630_145
Hatch
Unlocking the Hatch
COVER
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Unlock
RELEASE LEVER
If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the hatch, unlock it manually.
Place a cloth on the top side of the
cover to prevent scratches, then use
a small flat-tip screwdriver to remove
the cover on the back of the hatch.
140
Push the release lever to the lower
left as shown, and push the hatch to
open it.
If you need to unlock the hatch
manually, it means there is a
problem with the hatch. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:54:48 31TM8630_146
Seats
Front Seat Adjustments
TOC
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment
See pages 14 − 15 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
Instruments and Controls
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
2013 Insight
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
141
12/07/13 16:54:55 31TM8630_147
Seats
Head Restraints
TOC
Front Position
See page 16 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
CUSHION
Instruments and Controls
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.
RELEASE
BUTTON
LEGS
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
142
2013 Insight
SEAT-BACK
Adjusting the Head Restraint
The front and rear outer head
restraints adjust for height. You
need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button and push the
restraint down.
12/07/13 16:55:02 31TM8630_148
Seats
Removing the Head Restraint
Rear Center Position
CUSHION
Rear Outer Position
CUSHION
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seatback.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
For Rear Seat Head Restraints
LEGS
SEAT-BACK
RELEASE
BUTTON
RELEASE
BUTTON
LEGS
SEAT-BACK
The seat-back must be folded
forward (see page 145 ) to get ceiling
clearance for removal of the head
restraints.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, the
center head restraint should be
adjusted up or down, to match the
passenger’s height.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
143
12/07/13 16:55:09 31TM8630_149
Seats
Active Head Restraints
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Failure to reinstall, or correctly
reinstall, the head restraints can
result in severe injury during a
crash.
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its
normal position.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
144
against the likelihood of whiplash
and injuries to the neck
and upper spine.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:55:20 31TM8630_150
Seats
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
Folding the Rear Seats Down
The rear seat-backs can be folded
down for more cargo room.
RED INDICATOR
Each side folds down separately, so
you can still carry one or two
passengers in the rear seat.
Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back,
and make sure there are
no items on the floor before
folding down the seats.
1. Lower the rear head restraints to
their lowest positions. If you fold
down the right side seat-back, also
adjust the rear center head
restraint to its lowest position.
LEVER
2. Unlock the seat-back by pulling up
the release lever on the outer side
of each rear seat-back.
3. Fold the seat-back forward.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
145
12/07/13 16:55:26 31TM8630_151
Seats
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat-back to the upright position. Pull
on the seat-back to make sure it is
latched. If the seat-back is not
latched fully, the seat belt will not
work properly and you will see the
red indicator behind the release
lever as shown on the previous page.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 256 ).
Armrest
Make sure the seat-back and seat
cushion are locked securely and all
rear shoulder belts are positioned in
front of the rear seat-backs.
U.S. LX and EX models
The lid of the console compartment
can be used as an armrest.
146
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:55:33 31TM8630_152
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
UP
TOC
Instruments and Controls
SELECTOR
SWITCH
TAB
DOWN
Daytime Position
ADJUSTMENT
SWITCH
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep \
your settings.
Night Position
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position
reduces glare from headlights
behind you. Flip the tab on the
bottom edge of the mirror to select
the day or night position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R
(passenger’s side).
2013 Insight
147
12/07/13 16:55:38 31TM8630_153
Mirrors
Power Mirror Heaters
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
This heated mirror function has a
timer (see page 126 ).
TOC
Instruments and Controls
On U.S. EX models
and all Canadian models
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the rear window defogger
button. The indicator in the button
comes on as a reminder. Press the
button again to turn the heaters and
the defogger off.
148
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:55:43 31TM8630_154
Power Windows
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
DRIVER’S
WINDOW
SWITCH
AUTO − To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
FRONT
PASSENGER’S
WINDOW SWITCH
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
149
12/07/13 16:55:48 31TM8630_155
Power Windows
TOC
Instruments and Controls
When you push the main switch in,
the indicator comes on and the
passengers’ windows cannot be
raised or lowered. Use the main
switch when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally. To cancel
this feature, push on the switch
again. The switch will pop out.
The windows and the main switch
feature will operate for up to 10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
150
AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window
switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
NOTE: The driver’s window auto
reverse function is disabled when
you continuously pull up the switch.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:55:53 31TM8630_156
Parking Brake
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
TOC
Instruments and Controls
EX model is shown.
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display.
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is put into gear with the
parking brake on.
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 63 ).
2013 Insight
151
12/07/13 16:55:58 31TM8630_157
Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK
USB ADAPTER CABLE*
FRONT DOOR
POCKET
REAR DOOR BEVERAGE HOLDER
TOC
VANITY MIRROR*
SUN VISOR
CENTER POCKET
Instruments and Controls
GLOVE BOX
FLOOR STORAGE
COMPARTMENT
CARGO AREA
UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
SEAT-BACK
POCKETS*
CENTER CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT*
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
*: If equipped
EX model with navigation system is shown.
152
2013 Insight
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK/
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
CENTER TRAY*/
CENTER POCKET*
12/07/13 16:56:04 31TM8630_158
Interior Convenience Items
Under Floor Storage
STORAGE
Floor Storage Compartments
CARGO FLOOR
STRAP
TOC
Instruments and Controls
LID
To open the cargo floor, fold the
cargo floor forward.
To use the storage compartment
located on the left side of the cargo
area floor, hold the strap and raise
the lid.
Close the lid by pressing until it
latches.
2013 Insight
153
12/07/13 16:56:11 31TM8630_159
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
TOC
Instruments and Controls
BEVERAGE
HOLDERS
BEVERAGE
HOLDERS
Insight model and LX model
EX model
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the front and rear door pocket
beverage holders when you open or
close the doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
154
2013 Insight
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
Insight model and Canadian LX model
12/07/13 16:56:19 31TM8630_160
Interior Convenience Items
Accessory Power Socket
It will not power an automotive type
cigarette lighter element.
Console Compartment
Make sure to put the socket cover
back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects from getting into
the socket.
TOC
Instruments and Controls
LEVER
Your vehicle has an accessory power
socket in the front console panel.
On EX and U.S. LX models
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever and lift the
armrest.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less
(10 amps).
2013 Insight
155
12/07/13 16:56:26 31TM8630_161
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Center Tray
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
TOC
PARTITION
Instruments and Controls
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a
firm push.
There is a tray in the front of the
center console. You can also take the
partition out to extend the tray.
On EX models only
When you use the front beverage
holders, you need to put the partition
back to the original position on the
center console.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
156
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:56:32 31TM8630_162
Interior Convenience Items
Center Pockets
KNOB
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Push
LID
On all models
On EX models
To open the center pocket, press the
release button. The lid will unlatch
and swing up. To close it, push the
lid down until it latches.
To open the center pocket, push on
the knob. To close it, push the lid up
until it latches.
2013 Insight
157
12/07/13 16:56:40 31TM8630_163
Interior Convenience Items
Coat Hook
Sun Visors
Vanity Mirror
COAT HOOK
TOC
Instruments and Controls
EX model is shown.
To use a coat hook, slide it out
slightly, then pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is
pulled up when you are not using it.
This hook is not designed for large
or heavy items.
158
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
You can also use the sun visor at the
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
2013 Insight
On U.S. EX models
and Canadian models
To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
12/07/13 16:56:50 31TM8630_164
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION
TOC
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
Instruments and Controls
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see
page 105 .
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch: ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
If you leave any door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after about
15 minutes.
Spotlights
SPOTLIGHTS
Push
Push
EX model with navigation system
Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at
all times.
Open any door.
Unlock the driver’s door with the
key or remote transmitter.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
159
12/07/13 16:56:55 31TM8630_165
Interior Lights
SPOTLIGHTS
Cargo Area Light
TOC
Instruments and Controls
Push
Push
U.S. LX model
CARGO AREA LIGHT
Your vehicle has a cargo area light
on the left side panel of the cargo
area. It comes on when you open
the hatch.
160
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:57:00 31TM8630_166
Features
The climate control system in your
vehicle provides a comfortable
driving environment in all
weather conditions.
Features
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
2013 Insight
Climate Control System ................ 162
Audio System ................................. 168
Insight model
Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 169
Playing a Disc ................................. 173
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 180
LX model and EX model without
navigation system
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 181
Playing a Disc ................................. 188
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 194
Playing an iPod ............................. 195
iPod Error Messages .................. 201
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ......................................... 202
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages .................................... 211
FM/AM Radio Reception ............. 212
Protecting Your Discs ................... 214
Remote Audio Controls................. 217
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 218
Radio Theft Protection.................. 219
Setting the Clock ........................... 220
Security System ............................. 221
Cruise Control ................................ 222
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 225
161
12/07/13 16:57:04 31TM8630_167
Climate Control System
TOC
Features
FAN CONTROL BAR
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
FRESH AIR BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST BUTTON
U.S. EX model and Canadian models
ON/OFF BUTTON
162
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:57:13 31TM8630_168
Climate Control System
Voice Control System
On models with navigation system
TOC
The climate control system for your
vehicle can also be operated using
the voice control system. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle maintains the
interior temperature you select. The
system also adjusts the fan speed
and airflow levels.
Features
1. Press the AUTO button. You will
see AUTO in the display.
During the auto idle stop, the air
conditioning system will be turned
off. If the ECON mode is selected,
the fan may also be turned off.
Temperature Control
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
2. Set the desired temperature
by turning the temperature
control dial.
The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or
lower the interior temperature
to your preference.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
163
12/07/13 16:57:23 31TM8630_169
Climate Control System
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (
) or its upper limit
(
), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
TOC
Features
When you adjust a fan control, the
fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
ON/OFF Button
Each time you press this button, the
climate control system switches
between on and off. Turning on the
system with this button selects your
last climate control selection.
To Turn Everything Off
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
164
2013 Insight
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Fan Control
Press the ▲ side of the bar to
increase the fan speed and airflow.
Press the ▼ side of the bar to
decrease them.
12/07/13 16:57:35 31TM8630_170
Climate Control System
TOC
Features
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 126 ).
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
Select recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh
air mode.
On U.S. EX models and
all Canadian models
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Fresh Air Button
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
When the fresh air indicator is on,
air is brought in from the outside of
the vehicle.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
165
12/07/13 16:57:47 31TM8630_171
Climate Control System
TOC
Features
Mode Control
Windshield Defroster Button
Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield
by closing the corner vents on
the dashboard.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
166
2013 Insight
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows, set as follows:
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
2. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
3. Select
rear window.
4. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
For faster defogging, manually set
the fan speed to high.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
12/07/13 16:57:53 31TM8630_172
Climate Control System
Sunlight, Temperature, and
Humidity Sensors
TOC
Features
EX models
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Insight model and LX model
To regulate the interior temperature
and humidity, the climate control
system has two sensors. A sunlight
sensor is located in the top of the
dashboard and a temperature/
humidity sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
2013 Insight
167
12/07/13 16:58:00 31TM8630_173
Audio System
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
TOC
Insight model
For Insight model, see pages
169 through 180 .
Features
For LX and EX models without
navigation system, see pages
181 through 211 .
For EX model with navigation
system, see navigation system
manual for how to operate the audio
system.
168
2013 Insight
LX and EX models without
navigation system
12/07/13 16:58:04 31TM8630_174
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Insight model)
AM
FM
BUTTON BUTTON
TOC
Features
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE KNOB
A.SEL/SCAN
BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
2013 Insight
169
12/07/13 16:58:11 31TM8630_175
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Insight model)
TOC
To Play the AM/FM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
Features
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
170
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob to the right to tune to
a higher frequency, and turn it to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
SEEK/SKIP − The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the
or
side of the
SEEK bar, then release it.
2013 Insight
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the right side of the A. SEL/SCAN
bar, then release it. You will see
SCAN in the display. The system will
scan for a station with a strong signal.
When it finds one, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN side of the bar again.
12/07/13 16:58:20 31TM8630_176
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Insight model)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
TOC
Features
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. You can store one frequency
on FM1, and one frequency on
FM2 with each preset button.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button (1−6), then
press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Press the left side of the
A. SEL/SCAN bar. You will see
A. SEL flashing in the display, and
the system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL side of the bar. This restores
the presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see
page 212 .
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
2013 Insight
171
12/07/13 16:58:31 31TM8630_177
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Insight model)
TOC
Features
Adjusting the Sound
Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, and
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation) settings.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
Except SVC adjustment
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Wait a few seconds and the display
returns to normal.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 124 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
172
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:58:36 31TM8630_178
Playing a Disc (Insight model)
CD/AUX
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
TOC
Features
LOAD
INDICATOR
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE KNOB
A.SEL/SCAN
BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
DISP BUTTON
2013 Insight
173
12/07/13 16:58:42 31TM8630_179
Playing a Disc (Insight model)
To Play a Disc
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
TOC
Features
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD/
AUX button. You will see ‘‘CD’’
in the display.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
174
2013 Insight
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
12/07/13 16:58:49 31TM8630_180
Playing a Disc (Insight model)
TOC
Features
To Load a Disc
Text Data Display Function
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers
of the current folder and file are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
The display shows up to 10
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.). If the
text data has more than 10
characters, you will see the first 9
characters and the > indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 10 characters
are shown.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
175
12/07/13 16:58:57 31TM8630_181
Playing a Disc (Insight model)
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track
is selected.
TOC
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks (files in
MP3/WMA mode).
Features
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
press and release the
side of
the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA mode).
Press and release the
side, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the \
previous track.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar.
176
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:59:03 31TM8630_182
Playing a Disc (Insight model)
TOC
Features
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
the knob to the right to skip to the
next folder, and to the left to move to
the beginning of the current folder.
Turn it again to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
skips several folders at a time.
FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all files in
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT button twice.
You will see F-RPT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder. Press the RPT button
again to turn it off. Pressing the
RDM button, or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE knob also
turns off the repeat feature.
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
RANDOM (Random within a
disc) − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see
‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press the
RDM button for 2 seconds to return
to normal play.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
177
12/07/13 16:59:11 31TM8630_183
Playing a Disc (Insight model)
In MP3 or WMA mode
TOC
Features
FOLDER-RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder
in random order. To activate folder
random, press the RDM button.
You will see F-RDM in the display.
The system will then select and play
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random by
pressing and holding the
RDM button for 2 seconds.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal play.
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) −
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and
release the SCAN bar. You will see
SCAN in the display. You will get a
10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button for about 2 seconds to
get out of scan mode and play the
last track/file sampled.
Pressing either side of the
SEEK/ SKIP bar also turns off
the scan feature.
In MP3 or WMA mode
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN bar twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file in the last folder, the system
plays normally.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar, selecting a different folder
with the TUNE knob, or pressing the
SCAN bar, also turns off folder scan.
Each time you press and release
the SCAN bar, the mode
changes from scan to folder scan,
then to normal play.
178
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:59:17 31TM8630_184
Playing a Disc (Insight model)
TOC
Features
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD/AUX button.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 214 .
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD/AUX button again to
switch back to the disc player.
2013 Insight
179
12/07/13 16:59:25 31TM8630_185
Disc Player Error Messages (Insight model)
TOC
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 215 .
Error Message
Cause
CD FORMAT
Track/File format not
supported
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
see page 215. Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
180
Solution
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:59:30 31TM8630_186
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
BUTTON
TOC
Features
PRESET BUTTONS
BUTTON
VOL/SELECT KNOB
A.SEL BUTTON
FM/AM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK BUTTON
SEEK BUTTON
BUTTON
2013 Insight
181
12/07/13 16:59:41 31TM8630_187
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
To Play the FM/AM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
FM/AM button. Adjust the volume
by turning the VOL/SELECT knob.
TOC
Features
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the FM/AM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
182
TUNE − Use the SEEK button to
tune to a desired frequency. Press
the
button to tune to a higher
frequency, and the
button to
tune to a lower frequency.
You can also operate the tune
function by using the VOL/SELECT
knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob
and you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency. To turn it off, press
the VOL/SELECT knob or
button, or
button.
The system will return to the normal
display about 10 seconds after you
stop adjusting the tune mode.
2013 Insight
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press and hold the
or
side
of the SEEK button until you hear a
beep, then release it.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
12/07/13 16:59:49 31TM8630_188
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM
or FM.
TOC
Features
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button (1−6), then
press and hold it until you hear
a beep.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see
page 212 .
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
2013 Insight
183
12/07/13 16:59:55 31TM8630_189
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the PS name display function on.
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
TOC
Features
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’
Program Service (PS) Name Display
The program service name display
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. You can
turn this function on or off.
PROGRAM SERVICE
NAME DISPLAY ON
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
display shows the station name.
184
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:00:08 31TM8630_190
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
ALL PTY: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOC
Features
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
RDS CATEGORY
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
Press
or
button to
select an RDS category. The display
shows the selected RDS category
name for about 10 seconds. You can
use the search or scan function to
find radio stations in the selected
RDS category. If you do nothing
while the RDS category name is
displayed, the selected category
is canceled.
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion.
With the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press
or
button to display
and select an RDS category. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows;
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
185
12/07/13 17:00:17 31TM8630_191
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
Features
RDS Program Search
RDS Program SCAN
This function searches a frequency
for a strong signal from the
frequency that carry the selected
RDS category information. This can
help you to find a station in your
favorite category. To activate it,
press the
or
side of the
SEEK button. You will see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When
the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds a strong signal, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
186
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
2013 Insight
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five
seconds, then the system goes back
to the last selected station.
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display
function is off. In this case, the
display shows a frequency in place
of a RDS station name.
12/07/13 17:00:26 31TM8630_192
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
Features
Adjusting the Sound
Press the sound (
) button to
select an appropriate setting: bass,
treble, fader, balance, and SVC
(speed-sensitive volume
compensation). Turn the VOL/
SELECT knob to adjust the setting.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
BAS − Adjusts the bass.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the VOL/SELECT
knob to adjust the setting to your
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
Wait 10 seconds and the display
returns to normal.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 124 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the system is
turned off.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the VOL/SELECT knob
to adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
2013 Insight
187
12/07/13 17:00:32 31TM8630_193
Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
DISC SLOT
TOC
Features
RDM BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK BUTTON
SEEK BUTTON
BUTTON
188
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:00:41 31TM8630_194
Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
Features
To Play a Disc
You operate the in-dash disc player
with the same controls used for the
radio. To select the disc player, press
the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in
the display. The folder or track
numbers are shown in the display.
You can also select the displayed
information with the TITLE button
(see page 190 ). The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. The numbers
of the folder and track playing are
shown in the display on the disc
player. A disc can support more than
99 folders, and each folder can hold
more than 255 playable files. A disc
can hold up to 999 files in total.
When there are more than 99 folders
in a disc, the audio display only
shows two digits.
NOTE:
If a file on a WMA disc is protected
by digital rights management
(DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and
MP3/WMA files, you can choose
the format to listen by pressing the
CD button.
Video CDs and DVDs will not work
in this unit.
A disc compressed in AAC
format cannot be played in this
audio system.
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
189
12/07/13 17:00:49 31TM8630_195
Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
Features
To Load a Disc
Text Data Display Function
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers
of the current folder and file are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text, if the disc was recorded with
text data.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 214 .
190
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
2013 Insight
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the > indicator on
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown. You can see
up to 31 characters of text data.
12/07/13 17:01:03 31TM8630_196
Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
If you press and hold the TITLE
button again, the display shows the
first 15 characters again.
TOC
Features
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
You can use the SEEK button while
a disc is playing to change tracks
(files in MP3/WMA mode).
In MP3/WMA mode, use the
or
button to select
folders in the disc, and use the SEEK
button to change files.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
press and release the
side, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (files in
MP3/WMA mode). Press and
release the
side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
, or the
button.
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
You can also operate the track
selection by using the VOL/SELECT
knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob
and you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display.
Turn the knob to switch the track
number. Press the VOL/SELECT
knob or
button to set your
selection. To turn it off, press the
button.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
191
12/07/13 17:01:12 31TM8630_197
Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
Features
In MP3/WMA mode
In MP3/WMA mode
In MP3/WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press the
or
button. Press the
button to skip to the next
folder, and the
button to skip
to the previous folder.
FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
in the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3/WMA.
To activate folder repeat mode, press
the RPT button repeatedly until you
see F-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press and hold the RPT
button to turn it off.
FOLDER-RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays the
files in the current folder
in random order, rather than in the
order they are compressed in
MP3/WMA. To activate folder
random play, press the RDM
button. You will see F-RDM in the
display. The system will then
select and play files randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
folder random play by pressing
and holding the RDM button.
You can also operate the folder and
file selection by using the VOL/
SELECT knob. Press the VOL/
SELECT knob and you will see
‘‘SEL’’ in the display. Turn the knob
to switch the folder number and
press the knob to set your selection.
To turn it off, press the
button repeatedly.
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3/WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button to
turn it off.
192
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
RANDOM (Random within a
disc) − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc in random order.
In MP3/WMA mode, all files in all
folders are played in random order.
To activate random mode, press the
RDM button repeatedly until you see
RDM in the display. Press and hold
the RDM button to turn it off.
2013 Insight
Each time you press and release
the RDM button, the mode
changes from folder random play,
to within a disc random play,
then to normal play.
12/07/13 17:01:20 31TM8630_198
Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
Features
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the current folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’
in the display. You will get a 10
second sampling of each track/file in
the disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.
In MP3/WMA mode
FOLDER-SCAN − This feature,
when activated, samples the first file
in each folder on the disc in the
order they are recorded. To activate
the folder scan feature, press the
SCAN button repeatedly. You will
see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display. The
system will then play the first file in
the main folders for about 10
seconds. When it plays a file that you
want to continue listening to, press
and hold the SCAN button. When
the system samples the first file of
all folders, F-SCAN is canceled, and
the system plays normally.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
2013 Insight
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and
begin playing.
Press the FM/AM button to switch
to the radio while a disc is playing.
To play the disc, press the CD button.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
(
) button or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 214 .
193
12/07/13 17:01:26 31TM8630_199
Disc Player Error Messages (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
TOC
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page 215 .
Error Message
Cause
Solution
UNSUPPORTED
Track/File format not
supported
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 215). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Make sure it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
For more information, see page 215.
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
Mechanical Error
FOCUS Error
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
CHECK DISC
TOC Error
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
194
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:01:32 31TM8630_200
Playing an iPod (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
AUX BUTTON
iPod INDICATOR
USB INDICATOR
BUTTON
TOC
Features
BUTTON
RDM BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
SEEK (SKIP − ) BUTTON
SEEK (SKIP + ) BUTTON
BUTTON
2013 Insight
195
12/07/13 17:01:41 31TM8630_201
Playing an iPod (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
Features
To Play an iPod
This audio system can play the audio
files on the iPod with the same
controls used for the in-dash disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to
the USB adapter cable in the console
compartment by using your dock
connector, then press the AUX
button. The ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be
recharged with the ignition switch in
these positions.
iPod models confirmed to be
compatible with your audio system
using the USB adapter cable are:
Model
iPod classic 80/160 G
iPod classic 120 G
iPod classic 160 G (launch in 2009)
iPod (5th generation)
iPod nano
iPod touch
This system may not work with all
software versions of these devices.
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
Do not keep the iPod in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
The system will only play songs
stored on the iPod with iTunes.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
196
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:01:49 31TM8630_202
Playing an iPod (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
Connecting an iPod
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER
CABLE
TOC
Features
DOCK CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
197
12/07/13 17:01:57 31TM8630_203
Playing an iPod (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the TITLE
button the display mode switches
between the album name, the song
name, the artist name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
TOC
Features
The display shows up to 16
characters of the selected data. If the
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the > indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown.
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP button while an iPod is
playing to change files.
SKIP − Each time you press the
(SKIP +) button, the system
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press the
(SKIP −)
button, to skip backward to the
beginning of the current file. Press it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP button.
198
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:02:06 31TM8630_204
Playing an iPod (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
The display shows items on the
selected list. Turn the VOL/
SELECT knob to select an item, then
press the VOL/SELECT knob to set
your selection.
TOC
Press the
VOL/SELECT knob.
Features
If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available files
on the selected list are played.
Pressing the
button goes back
to the previous display and pressing
the TITLE button cancels this
setting mode.
You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums and songs, by using
the VOL/SELECT knob. Push the
VOL/SELECT knob to switch the
display to an iPod menu, then turn
the VOL/SELECT knob to select a
desired list. Press the VOL/SELECT
knob to set your selection.
To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:
You can select any type of repeat and
shuffle mode by using the RPT
button or the RDM button.
REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the
display. To turn it off, press the RPT
button again.
SHUFFLE ALL − This feature
plays all available files in a selected
list (playlists, artists, albums or
songs) in random order. To activate
the shuffle all feature, press the
RDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ in
the display. To turn it off, press and
hold the RDM button.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
199
12/07/13 17:02:14 31TM8630_205
Playing an iPod (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
Features
SHUFFLE ALBUM − This feature
plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums
or songs) in random order. The files
in each album are played in the
recorded order. To activate the
shuffle album feature, press the
RDM button repeatedly. You will see
‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press and hold the RDM button.
Each time you press the RDM
button, the mode changes from
shuffle all play to shuffle album play,
then to normal play.
To Stop Playing Your iPod
To play the radio when an iPod is
playing, press the FM/AM button. If
a disc is in the audio unit, press the
CD button to play the disc.
Disconnecting an iPod
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message* in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
the iPod display before you
disconnect it. Make sure to follow
the iPod’s instructions on how to
disconnect the dock connector from
the USB adapter cable.
* : The displayed message may vary
on models or versions. On some
models, there is no message
to disconnect.
200
2013 Insight
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the display shows ‘‘USB
NO DATA.’’
12/07/13 17:02:18 31TM8630_206
iPod Error Messages (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing
an iPod, find the solution in the
chart to the right. If you cannot
clear the error message, take your
vehicle to your dealer.
TOC
Error Message
Cause
Features
USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
iPod NO SONG
USB ROM Error
UNSUPPORTED
VER.
Use of unsupported
iPod
CONNECT RETRY
Appears when an
incompatible device is
connected
No files in iPod
Recognition failure of
iPod
2013 Insight
Solution
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
system off, and turn it on again. Do not
reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
connected. See page 196 for the specification
information for iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
Appears when the system does not
acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
201
12/07/13 17:02:24 31TM8630_207
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
BUTTON
USB INDICATOR
AUX BUTTON
TOC
Features
BUTTON
VOL/SELECT BUTTON
RDM BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
SEEK (SKIP − )
BUTTON
SEEK (SKIP + )
BUTTON
BUTTON
202
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:02:30 31TM8630_208
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
Features
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can operate the
audio files on a USB flash memory
device with the same controls used
for the in-dash disc player. To play a
USB flash memory device, connect it
to the USB adapter cable in the
console compartment, then press the
AUX button.
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC* formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing.
*:
Only AAC format files recorded with
iTunes are playable on this audio unit.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
203
12/07/13 17:02:37 31TM8630_209
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
TOC
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Features
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
204
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:02:44 31TM8630_210
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
When the USB flash memory device
is connected, the USB indicator is
shown in the display.
Connecting a USB Flash
Memory Device
USB CONNECTOR
TOC
Features
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB connector
correctly and securely.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
205
12/07/13 17:02:53 31TM8630_211
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
TOC
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display mode shows you
in sequence, the folder name, the file
name, the artist name, the album
name, the song name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press the
button or
button.
Press the
button to skip to
the next folder, and press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the previous folder.
Features
The display shows up to 16
characters of the selected data. If the
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the > indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown.
206
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP button while a USB
flash memory device is playing to
change files.
SKIP − Each time you press the
(SKIP +) button, the system
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press the
(SKIP −)
button, to skip backward to the
beginning of the current file. Press it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP button.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:03:01 31TM8630_212
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
To Select a File from Folder
and File Lists
Pressing the
button goes back
to the previous display and pressing
the TITLE button cancels this
setting mode.
Folder Selection
To Select Repeat,
Random or Scan Mode:
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
RPT button, RDM button, or SCAN
button.
TOC
Features
Track Selection
Press the
VOL/SELECT knob.
You can also select a folder or file by
using the VOL/SELECT knob. Push
the VOL/SELECT knob to switch
the display to the folder or file list,
then turn the VOL/SELECT knob to
select a folder or file. Press the
VOL/SELECT knob to set your
selection.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
207
12/07/13 17:03:05 31TM8630_213
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the
display. To turn it off, press and hold
the RPT button.
TOC
Features
FOLDER REPEAT − This feature
replays all the files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the folder repeat feature,
press the RPT button repeatedly.
You will see ‘‘F-RPT’’ in the display.
To turn it off, press and hold the
RPT button.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
208
2013 Insight
RANDOM − This feature plays all
the files in random order. To activate
the track random feature, press the
RDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ in
the display. To turn it off, press and
hold the RDM button.
12/07/13 17:03:10 31TM8630_214
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
FOLDER RANDOM − This
feature plays the files in the current
folder in random order. To activate
the folder random feature, press the
RDM button repeatedly. You will see
‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press and hold the RDM button.
Features
Each time you press the RDM
button, the mode changes from track
random, play to folder random play,
then to normal play.
SCAN − This feature samples all
files in the current folder in the
order they are stored. To activate
the scan feature, press the SCAN
button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each file in the folder.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of the scan mode and play
the last file sampled.
FOLDER SCAN − This feature
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press the SCAN button repeatedly.
You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
the first file in each folder. Press and
hold the SCAN button to get out of
the folder scan mode and play the
last file sampled.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
2013 Insight
209
12/07/13 17:03:16 31TM8630_215
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
TOC
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To play the radio when a USB flash
memory device is playing, press the
FM/AM button. If a disc is in the
audio unit, press the CD button to
play the disc.
Disconnecting a USB Flash
Memory Device
Features
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the display shows ‘‘USB NO DATA.’’
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
210
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:03:20 31TM8630_216
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
TOC
Error Message
Features
USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
Cause
USB ROM Error
Appears when an
incompatible device is
connected
UNPLAYABLE
FILE
Use of unsupported
files
USB NO SONG
No files in USB flash
memory device
UNSUPPORTED
Use of unsupported
USB flash memory
device
2013 Insight
Solution
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
system off, and turn it on again. Do not
reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the files in the USB flash
memory device are DRM or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files
in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. See page 203 for the specification
information for the USB flash memory device.
If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
211
12/07/13 17:03:29 31TM8630_217
FM/AM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these
frequencies:
TOC
Features
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
212
Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
2013 Insight
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
12/07/13 17:03:34 31TM8630_218
FM/AM Radio Reception
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
TOC
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
2013 Insight
213
12/07/13 17:03:43 31TM8630_219
Protecting Your Discs
General Information
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
TOC
Features
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the
system.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
214
Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
2013 Insight
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the
disc. These, along with
contamination from finger prints,
liquids, and felt- tip pens, can cause
the disc to not play properly, or
possibly jam in the drive.
12/07/13 17:03:54 31TM8630_220
Protecting Your Discs
TOC
Features
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
2. Damaged discs
Chipped/
Cracked
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed
With Plastic
Ring
3. Poor quality discs
Warped
Burrs
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
215
12/07/13 17:04:03 31TM8630_221
Protecting Your Discs
4. Small, irregular shaped discs
5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
TOC
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD
Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Can Shape
216
Arrow Shape
2013 Insight
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
12/07/13 17:04:11 31TM8630_222
Remote Audio Controls
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
CH BUTTON
TOC
Features
VOL BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
disc or a PC card (if a disc or a PC
card is loaded), or an audio unit
connected to the auxiliary input jack
or the USB adapter cable.
On U.S. LX model and EX models
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (+) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station. If you press and hold the CH
button (+) or (−), the system goes
into the seek mode. It finds a station
with a strong signal.
If you are playing a disc, iPod or USB
flash memory device, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3, WMA or AAC
format) each time you press the top
(+) of the CH button. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track/file.
Press it twice to return to the
previous track/file.
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
217
12/07/13 17:04:17 31TM8630_223
Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
TOC
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the seek function to select folders.
Press and hold the top (+) of the
CH button until you hear a beep to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom (−) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
Features
If you are playing a PC card, press
the top (+) of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom (−) to go back to the
previous file.
Auxiliary Input Jack
On Insight model and EX model with
navigation system
Your vehicle has the auxiliary input
jack on the front panel. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories using a
1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the CD/
AUX (on vehicles with navigation
system) or AUX (on vehicles without
navigation system) button to select it.
218
2013 Insight
On LX model and EX model without
navigation system
12/07/13 17:04:24 31TM8630_224
Radio Theft Protection
TOC
Features
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system disables itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display next
time you turn on the system. Use the
preset bars (icons on models with
navigation system) to enter the fivedigit code. The code is on the Antitheft Identification Card included
in your owner’s manual kit. When it
is entered correctly, the radio will
start playing.
The Anti-theft Identification Card
also lists your audio serial number. It
is best to store the card in a safe
place at home. In addition, you
should write the audio system’s
serial number in this owner’s manual.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
The system will retain your AM and
FM presets even if power is
disconnected.
Canadian owners
If you lose the Anti-theft
Identification Card, you must obtain
the code from your dealer. To do this,
you will need the audio system’s
serial number. If you do not have the
serial number with you, ask your
dealer how to retrieve it.
U.S. owners
We recommend that you register the
security code at Owner Link (owners.
honda.com). If you lose the Antitheft Identification Card before
registering the code at Owner Link,
you must obtain the code from your
dealer or https://radio-navicode.honda.
com/. To do this, you will need the
audio system’s serial number. If you
do not have the serial number with
you, ask your dealer or go to https://
radio-navicode.honda.com/ for
information on how to retrieve it.
2013 Insight
On models with navigation system
You need to enter a separate code
for the navigation system to
reactivate. The Anti-theft Card also
lists the navigation system’s security
code and serial number. Follow the
same procedure to retrieve the serial
number and obtain the code, and
read the navigation system manual
for details.
219
12/07/13 17:04:33 31TM8630_225
Setting the Clock (Models without navigation system)
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
TOC
Insight model
EX model without navigation system
and LX model
CLOCK BUTTON
(A.SEL side of the A.SEL/SCAN bar)
HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 1)
Features
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold
the CLOCK button, then press the R
(reset) button to set the time back to
the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the same
procedure sets the time forward to
the beginning of the next hour.
220
HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 4)
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 6)
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 5)
For example:
CLOCK BUTTON
RESET BUTTON
(FM/AM button)
(PRESET 3)
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 2)
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
When you set the time, the ignition
switch must be ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:04:40 31TM8630_226
Security System
The security system does not set if
the hood, hatch, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and hatch open
indicator on the instrument panel
and multi-information display (see
page 12 ) to see if the doors and
hatch are fully closed. Since it is not
part of the monitor display, manually
check the hood.
On LX and EX models
TOC
Features
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for two
minutes, then the system resets. To
deactivate the system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system sets
automatically 15 seconds after you
lock the doors, hood, and the hatch.
For the system to activate, you must
lock the doors and the hatch from
the outside with the key, or use
driver’s lock tab, door lock master
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Once the security system is sets,
opening any door, the hatch, or the
hood without using the key or the
remote transmitter, will cause the
alarm to activate. It also activates if
the audio unit is removed from the
dashboard or the wiring is cut.
NOTE: To see if the system is set
after you exit the vehicle, press the
LOCK button on the remote
transmitter within five seconds. If
the system is set, the horn will beep
once.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
The alarm also activates if a
passenger inside the locked vehicle
turns the ignition switch on.
2013 Insight
221
12/07/13 17:04:48 31TM8630_227
Cruise Control
On LX and EX models
TOC
Features
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Using the Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
222
2013 Insight
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
the cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
12/07/13 17:04:56 31TM8630_228
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
TOC
Features
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
2013 Insight
223
12/07/13 17:05:04 31TM8630_229
Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
EX models only
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
Tapping either of the paddle shifters
shifts the speed up or down, but does
not cancel the cruise control. For
more information on driving with
paddle shifters, see page 276 .
TOC
Features
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
224
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously-set
cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
2013 Insight
12/07/23 16:33:55 31TM8630_230
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone.
TOC
Features
For models with the navigation
system, see the Navigation System
Manual for how to operate the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink .
To use HFL, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
HFL TALK
BUTTON
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.
com or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
HFL BACK BUTTON
HFL Talk button − Press and
release to give a command or answer
a call.
HFL Back button − Press and
release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
225
12/07/13 17:05:18 31TM8630_231
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Voice Control Tips
TOC
Features
Press and release the HFL Talk
button each time you want to
make a command. After the beep,
speak in a clear, natural tone.
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say ‘‘Call 123-456-####’’ or
‘‘Dial Peter.’’
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system
volume knob or the steering
wheel volume controls.
MICROPHONE
Air or wind noise from the
dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
226
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:05:26 31TM8630_232
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Help Features
To hear general HFL information,
including help on pairing a phone
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’
TOC
Information Display
As an incoming call notification, you
will see the following display:
SIGNAL STRENGTH
Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to HFL.
BATTERY
LEVEL STATUS
Features
For help at any time, including a
list of available commands, say
‘‘Hands free help.’’
HFL
MODE
ROAM STATUS
PHONE DIALING
The Bluetooth icon
will also
appear on the display when a phone
is linked.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
227
12/07/13 17:05:34 31TM8630_233
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
How to Use HFL
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
TOC
Features
‘‘Phone Setup’’
Press HFL
Talk button
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’
‘‘Pair’’
Pair a phone to the system (See page 231)
‘‘Edit’’
Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 232)
‘‘Delete’’
Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 232)
‘‘List’’
Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 232)
‘‘Status’’
Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
(See page 233)
‘‘Next Phone’’
Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 233)
‘‘Set Pairing
Code’’
Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number
(See page 233)
‘‘123-555-####’’
‘‘Jim Smith’’
Enter desired phone number (See page 234)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
(See page 234)
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
228
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:05:41 31TM8630_234
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
TOC
Features
‘‘Redial’’
Redial the last number called (See page 235)
‘‘Transfer’’
Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 236)
‘‘Mute’’
Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 236)
‘‘Send’’
Send numbers or names during a call (See page 236)
Press HFL
Talk button
‘‘Phonebook’’
‘‘Store’’
Store a phonebook entry (See page 237)
‘‘Edit’’
Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 237)
‘‘Delete’’
Delete a phonebook entry (See page 238)
‘‘Receive
Contact’’
If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
your phone to HFL (See page 238)
‘‘List’’
Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 238)
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
2013 Insight
CONTINUED
229
12/07/13 17:05:48 31TM8630_235
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 239)
‘‘Security’’
TOC
Features
‘‘System
Set up’’
‘‘Change Passcode’’
Change your security passcode (See page 240)
‘‘Call Notification’’
Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
(See page 240)
‘‘Auto Transfer’’
Press HFL
Talk button
‘‘Clear’’
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle (See page 240)
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode (See page 241)
‘‘Change Language’’
Change language from English to French (See page 242)*
‘‘Tutorial’’
Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 227)
‘‘Hands Free Help’’
Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 227)
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
* : Canadian models
230
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:05:59 31TM8630_236
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
Phone Setup
This command group is available for
paired cell phones.
Phone pairing tips
TOC
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Features
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to
your phone’s manual.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
If after three minutes your phone
is not ready to pair or a phone is
not found, the system will time out
and return to idle.
To pair a cell phone:
1. Press and release the HFL Talk
button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
you information about the pairing
process. If it is not the first phone
you are pairing, say ‘‘Phone
setup’’ and say ‘‘Pair.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
pairing code and begin searching
for your phone.
3. When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
the options and enter the 4-digit
code from the previous step.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
231
12/07/13 17:06:09 31TM8630_237
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
TOC
Features
To rename a paired phone:
To delete a paired phone:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.
3. If there is more than one phone
paired to the system, HFL will ask
you which phone’s name you want
to change. Follow the HFL
prompts and rename the phone.
3. HFL will ask you which phone you
want to delete. Follow the HFL
prompts to continue with the
deletion.
232
2013 Insight
To hear the names of
all paired phones:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
3. HFL will read out all the paired
phone’s names.
12/07/13 17:06:21 31TM8630_238
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
TOC
Features
To hear which paired phone is
currently linked:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Status’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Next phone’’ after the
prompts.
3. HFL will tell you which phone is
linked to the system.
3. HFL disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone.
4. Once another phone is found, it is
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
To change the pairing code setting:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Set pairing code’’ after the
prompts.
3. If you want HFL to create a
random code each time you pair a
phone, say ‘‘Random.’’ If you want
to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘Fixed’’
and follow the HFL prompts.
If no other phones are found or
paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
2013 Insight
233
12/07/13 17:06:32 31TM8630_239
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Making a Call
You can make calls using a name in
the HFL phonebook or any phone
number. You can also redial the last
number called.
TOC
Features
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means, the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet
(10 meters).
During a call, HFL allows you to talk
up to 30 minutes after you remove
the key from the ignition switch.
However, this may weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
234
To make a call using a name in the
HFL phonebook:
To make a call using a phone
number:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name stored in the HFL
phonebook that you want to call.
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the phone number you want to dial.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the name and make
the call.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number and say
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:06:39 31TM8630_240
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To redial the last number
called by HFL:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Redial.’’
TOC
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, an incoming
call notification (if activated) will
play and interrupt the audio system
if it is on.
Features
Press the HFL Talk button to answer
the call, or the HFL Back button to
hang up.
2013 Insight
Call Waiting
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the HFL Talk button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
To return to the original call, press
the HFL Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFL Back button.
235
12/07/13 17:06:49 31TM8630_241
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
TOC
Muting a Call
You can mute your voice to the
person you are talking to during
a call.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Transfer.’’
To mute your voice during a call,
press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Mute.’’
Features
Transferring a Call
You can transfer a call from HFL
to your phone, or from your phone
to HFL.
To unmute your voice, press and
release the HFL Talk button and say
‘‘Mute’’ again.
Send Numbers or
Names During a Call
HFL allows you to send numbers or
names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
system.
To send a name or number
during a call:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Send.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name or number you want to
send.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to send
the tones and continue the call.
NOTE: To send a pound (#), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
236
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:07:04 31TM8630_242
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
TOC
Features
Phonebook
You can store up to 50 names with
their associated numbers in HFL.
The numbers you store can be not
only phone numbers but other types,
such as account numbers or
passwords, which can be sent during
a menu-driven call.
To store a phonebook entry:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
NOTE:
To edit the number stored in a name:
Avoid using duplicate name
entries.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name
entry.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
multisyllabic or longer name. For
example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of
‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
‘‘John.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name entry you want to edit.
4. When asked, say the new number
for that name.
5. Follow the HFL prompts to
complete the edit.
2. Say ‘‘Store’’ after the prompts.
3. Say a name you want to list as your
phonebook entry.
4. Say the number you want to store
for the name entry.
5. Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘Enter’’ to store the entry.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
237
12/07/13 17:07:17 31TM8630_243
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
TOC
Features
To delete a name:
To list all names in the phonebook:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
3. Say the name you want to delete
and follow the HFL prompts to
complete the deletion.
3. HFL begins reading the names in
the order they were stored.
4. If you hear a name you want to call,
immediately press the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Call.’’
To store a specific phone number
from your cell phone directly to the
HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
2. Say ‘‘Receive contact ’’ after the
prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a
number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the number, or say
‘‘Discard’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
5. Follow the HFL prompts if you
want to store another number.
238
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:07:25 31TM8630_244
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
System Setup
This command group allows you
to change or customize HFL
basic settings.
TOC
To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the
HFL system for security purposes:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
NOTE: Once a passcode is set, you
will need to enter it to use HFL each
time you start the vehicle. If you
forget the code, your dealer
will have to reset it for you, or
you will have to clear the entire
system (see page 241 ).
Features
2. Say ‘‘Security’’ after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.
4. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
239
12/07/13 17:07:37 31TM8630_245
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To change your security passcode:
TOC
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
To select either a ring tone or a
prompt as the incoming call
notification*:
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Features
2. Say ‘‘Change passcode’’ after the
prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the new 4-digit passcode.
4. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
2. Say ‘‘Call notification’’ after the
prompts.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘Ring tone’’ or ‘‘Prompt .’’ You
can also say ‘‘Off ’’ for no audible
incoming call notification.
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
* : The default setting is a ring tone.
240
To activate or deactivate the auto
transfer function:
2013 Insight
2. Say ‘‘Auto transfer’’ after the
prompts.
3. HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.
12/07/13 17:07:46 31TM8630_246
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
TOC
To clear the system:
Quick Language Selection
This operation clears the passcodes,
paired phones, all names in the HFL
phonebook, and all imported
phonebook data.
Canadian models only
To quickly change the language:
Features
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say the language you want to
change to in that language.
2. Follow the HFL prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Clear’’ after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
continue to complete the clearing
procedure.
You can also clear the system when
you have forgotten the passcode and
cannot access HFL. When HFL asks
you for the passcode, say ‘‘System
clear.’’ Paired phones, all names in
the HFL phonebook and all imported
phonebook data will be lost.
2013 Insight
241
12/07/13 17:07:54 31TM8630_247
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Change Language
Canadian models only
To change the system language
between English and French:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
TOC
Features
1. Say ‘‘Change language.’’
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
2. Follow the HFL prompts to
change the language to English or
French.
If you have not named your paired
phone in the language you just
selected, HFL will ask you to name it
in the current language.
When French is your currently
selected language, you can give voice
commands in French.
242
2013 Insight
This device complies with the
appropriate requirements or the
required standards. See page 392 for
more information.
12/07/13 17:07:58 31TM8630_248
Before Driving
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check
the levels of important fluids.
You also need to know how
to properly store luggage or
packages. The information in
this section will help you. If
you plan to add any accessories
to your vehicle, please read the
information in this section first.
2013 Insight
Break-in Period .............................. 244
Fuel Recommendation .................. 244
Service Station Procedures .......... 245
Refueling..................................... 245
Tighten Fuel Cap Message ...... 247
Opening and Closing the
Hood ........................................ 248
Oil Check .................................... 249
Engine Coolant Check .............. 250
Fuel Economy ................................ 251
Accessories and Modifications .... 254
Carrying Cargo .............................. 256
243
12/07/13 17:08:06 31TM8630_249
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
TOC
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Before Driving
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
244
To help prevent harmf ul f uel system
and engine deposits, use high quality
f uel containing detergent and additives.
In addition, in order to maintain good
perf ormance, f uel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain harmf ul manganesebased f uel additives such as MMT, if
such gasoline is available.
2013 Insight
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service. Some
gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol. Your
vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol. If you notice
any undesirable operating
symptoms, try another service
station or switch to another brand
of gasoline.
12/07/13 17:08:13 31TM8630_250
Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
TOC
Before Driving
Because the level of detergency and
additives in gasoline vary in the
market, Honda endorses the use of
‘‘TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline’’
where available to help maintain the
performance and reliability of your
vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline
standard jointly established by
leading automotive manufacturers to
meet the needs of today’s advanced
engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers
will, in most cases, identify their
gasoline as having met ‘‘TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline’’ standards at the
retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper
level of detergent additives and be
free of metallic additives. The proper
level of detergent additives, and
absence of harmful metallic additives
in gasoline, help avoid build-up of
deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related
information for your vehicle, or
information on gasoline that does not
contain MMT, visit Owner Link at
owners.honda.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional
information on gasoline. For more
information on top tier gasoline, visit
Refueling
FUEL FILL DOOR
www.toptiergas.com.
Push
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
2. Outside of the vehicle, push on the
right side edge of the fuel fill door
in the middle until you hear a click.
The fuel fill door will pop up
slightly. Pull it outward to open it.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
245
12/07/13 17:08:19 31TM8630_251
Service Station Procedures
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
HOLDER
FUEL FILL CAP
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
TOC
Before Driving
TETHER
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank
equalizes. The fuel fill cap is
attached to the fuel filler with a
tether. Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill door.
246
2013 Insight
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
12/07/13 17:08:26 31TM8630_252
Service Station Procedures
TOC
Before Driving
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the multiinformation display. If the system
still detects an evaporative system
leak after retightening the cap, the
malfunction indicator lamp may
come on (see page 365 ).
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
message, press the INFO button.
The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak
is detected a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message appears on the multiinformation display.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
247
12/07/13 17:08:33 31TM8630_253
Service Station Procedures
TOC
Before Driving
If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 365 .
Opening and Closing the Hood
LATCH
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
Pull
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle to the left to
release the hood. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the
hood without lifting the handle,
the mechanism should be
cleaned and lubricated.
248
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:08:41 31TM8630_254
Service Station Procedures
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
GRIP
Oil Check
DIPSTICK
TOC
Before Driving
SUPPORT ROD
CLIP
3. Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the
end into the designated hole
in the hood.
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
249
12/07/13 17:08:49 31TM8630_255
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
MAX
TOC
UPPER MARK
Before Driving
LOWER MARK
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 310 .
250
RESERVE TANK
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 315 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
2013 Insight
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 307 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
12/07/13 17:08:57 31TM8630_256
Fuel Economy
TOC
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits, and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in light traffic. A range of
miles per gallon achieved is also
provided.
Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
City MPG
Highway MPG
Combined Fuel
Economy
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
fueleconomy.gov
(Canada: Visit www. vehicles.gc.ca)
2013 Insight
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit www.
251
12/07/13 17:09:10 31TM8630_257
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
TOC
Before Driving
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient
when warmed up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the multi-
252
information display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 307 ).
For example:
Use the recommended viscosi
ty motor oil, displaying
the API Certification Seal
(see page 311).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling
resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel economy.
2013 Insight
Drive Efficiently
Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel economy at speeds above
45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
per liter).
Use the ECON mode as much as
possible.
12/07/13 17:09:19 31TM8630_258
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
TOC
Before Driving
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Miles
driven
Gallons
of fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liter
Kilometers
L per
100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).
1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
2013 Insight
253
12/07/13 17:09:27 31TM8630_259
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
non-Honda accessories, may make
your vehicle unsafe. Before you
make any modifications or add any
accessories, be sure to read the
following information.
TOC
Before Driving
Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
254
Before installing any accessory:
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes,
and tire pressure monitoring
system (if equipped).
2013 Insight
Make sure the accessory
does not obscure any lights, or
interfere with proper vehicle
operation or performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 367 ) or interfere
with the proper operation of
your vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
12/07/13 17:09:35 31TM8630_260
Accessories and Modifications
TOC
Before Driving
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS)*.
Some examples are:
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling, stability, and
reliability.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
* : U.S. models
2013 Insight
255
12/07/13 17:09:44 31TM8630_261
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
FLOOR STORAGE
COMPARTMENT
DOOR POCKETS
CENTER POCKET
Glove box
Door pockets
GLOVE BOX
Seat-back pockets*
Under floor storage
TOC
Before Driving
Floor storage compartment
Center tray
Console compartment*
Center pocket(s)*
Cargo area
CARGO AREA
UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
SEAT-BACK
POCKETS*
CENTER TRAY*/
CENTER POCKET*
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT*
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
EX with navigation system model is shown.
*: If equipped
256
*: If equipped
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:09:55 31TM8630_262
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
TOC
Label Example
Before Driving
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
2013 Insight
(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
CONTINUED
257
12/07/13 17:10:01 31TM8630_263
Carrying Cargo
Example 1
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs
(68 kg x 4 = 272 kg)
Cargo Weight
250 lbs
(113 kg)
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
TOC
Before Driving
Example 2
Example 3
258
2013 Insight
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). Both are on a label on
the driver’s doorjamb.
12/07/13 17:10:10 31TM8630_264
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the
Passenger Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
TOC
Before Driving
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the operation of the seats,
or the operation of the sensors
under the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the hatch, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
Try to secure the items with rope
or cord so they will not shift while
you are driving.
Do not stack items higher than the
back of the rear seats. They can
block your view and be thrown
around the vehicle during a crash.
Do not spill any liquids on or
around the IMA battery. Spilled
liquids may damage the IMA
battery. If you accidentally spill
liquids on or around the battery,
ensure that the spill is completely
wiped up at the earliest
possible time.
2013 Insight
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
hatch, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 56 .
If you fold the rear seats down, tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop. Keep all cargo below
the bottom of the windows. If it is
higher, it could interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Refer to page 145 for folding rear
seats.
259
12/07/13 17:10:14 31TM8630_265
Carrying Cargo
Air Intake
Do not spill any liquids over the air
intake or insert any foreign objects
in it. This may damage the IMA
battery and the power control unit.
TOC
Before Driving
AIR INTAKE
The air intake for the IMA battery
and electronics is located on the rear
left pillar. Do not block this air intake.
Doing so may cause the IMA battery
and the power control unit to
overheat, causing the IMA to shut
down. It will start working again
after it cools.
260
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:10:18 31TM8630_266
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmissions (CVT). It
also includes important information
on parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the vehicle stability assist
(VSA ) system, and the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
Before Driving
2013 Insight
Preparing to Drive ......................... 262
Starting the Engine........................ 263
Eco Assist System ......................... 264
Automatic Transmission (CVT) .. 271
Driving with the Paddle
Shifters ........................................ 276
Auto Idle Stop ................................. 281
Parking ............................................ 284
Braking System.............................. 285
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 287
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ....................................... 289
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System ..... 293
Hill Start Assist System ............ 295
Towing a Trailer ............................ 296
261
12/07/13 17:10:27 31TM8630_267
Preparing to Drive
TOC
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 17 ).
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
5. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 141 ).
10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the multi-information
display (see pages 61 , 72 and 89 ).
Before Driving
2. Check that the hood and hatch are
fully closed.
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page 338 ).
262
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 147 ).
7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 128 ).
8. Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:10:34 31TM8630_268
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
TOC
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 130 .
Starting in Cold Weather
In cold weather, the conventional
starter is used instead of the IMA
system starter. This is normal.
Before Driving
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
2013 Insight
263
12/07/13 17:10:41 31TM8630_269
Eco Assist System
ECON MODE INDICATOR
Ambient Meter
ECON BUTTON
TOC
Eco-drive Result
Before Driving
Eco Drive Bar
Eco Assist System is a driver
feedback system designed to help
you develop and maintain a fuel
efficient driving style.
The system monitors your driving
style, and can display how it impacts
your vehicle’s fuel economy. You can
then make adjustments to your
driving style to maximize fuel
economy. (For additional
information on fuel economy, see
page 251 .)
Your vehicle’s fuel economy may
improve more with the ECON mode
on (see page 127 ).
The driver feedback information is
shown in two locations:
The ambient meter, located
behind the speedometer (see
page 72 ).
The multi-information display (see
page 75 ).
264
2013 Insight
12/07/23 10:21:17 31TM8630_270
Eco Assist System
Eco Drive Bar
Center Position
Acceleration
Deceleration
Monitor
Monitor
TOC
Eco
Drive
Bar
Before Driving
Efficient Zones
Inefficient Braking Zone
Inefficient Driving Zone
ECO ELEMENTS
The Eco Drive Bar on the ecological
drive display appears on the multiinformation display while you drive.
During acceleration, the bar
extends to the right of the
center line.
During deceleration, the bar
extends to the left of the
center line.
If the bar stays within the Efficient
Driving Zones, your current
driving style is conducive to good
fuel economy.
If the bar extends into the
Inefficient Driving Zones, your
current driving style is not
conducive to good fuel economy.
It is recommended to drive in the D
position for better fuel efficiency.
Eco Drive Bar Examples
Driving Style
Eco Drive Bar
Slow, steady
acceleration maximizes fuel
economy
Slow deceleration maximizes fuel
economy
Moderate
acceleration
Moderate
deceleration
Aggressive/
Inconsistent
acceleration - lowers
fuel economy
Aggressive
deceleration - lowers
fuel economy
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
265
12/07/13 17:11:02 31TM8630_271
Eco Assist System
Ambient Meter
AMBIENT METER
(Background Color)
Meter Background Color
Fuel Economy
Green
High
TOC
Before Driving
Blue Green
U.S. model is shown.
The Ambient Meter (the light
behind the speedometer) changes
color to show the effects of your
driving style. This feature can be
turned off (see page 103 ).
Blue
Low
266
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:11:10 31TM8630_272
Eco Assist System
Eco Assist Scoring
A point system is used so you can
monitor your driving style and the
impact on fuel economy. Points are:
Accumulated when your driving
style is fuel efficient
TOC
Real Time Score
FIRST STAGE
SECOND STAGE
THIRD STAGE
Before Driving
Deducted when your style is not
fuel efficient
PLANT ICON
With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position
Eco Assist scoring is displayed on
the multi-information display in the
following ways:
Real Time Score − Your current
trip is represented on the ecological
drive display, starting without any
leaves on the plants. Leaves then
accumulate during the current trip,
as long as you maintain an economic
driving style.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
267
12/07/13 17:11:16 31TM8630_273
Eco Assist System
Drive Cycle Score − The score
from your just completed trip is
represented on the Eco Score screen
by the ‘‘plant’’ icons.
TOC
Lifetime Points − Cumulative, or
lifetime trips, which build up over
time, represented by a bar graph at
the bottom of the Eco Score display.
Before Driving
Each time you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position, the
Eco Score displays for a few seconds
to show your current stage and
lifetime points.
Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
TROPHY
STAGE-UP
RECOGNITION
ICON
DRIVE CYCLE
SCORE
LIFETIME
POINTS
STAGE-DOWN RECOGNITION ICON
When turning off the ignition switch
268
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:11:28 31TM8630_274
Eco Assist System
TOC
Before Driving
There are three Eco stages, with
five plants per stage. As you
accumulate a specified number of
leaves, you advance from one stage
to the next. The plant grows
leaves from left to right, or
loses them from right to left. A
trophy icon appears once you
have reached the maximum third
stage score.
Real time scores must accumulate over time to result in a stage change. In order to build lifetime
points and advance to the next stage, you need to keep your efficient driving style every time you
make a trip. It can take several months to move from one stage to the next. Individual results will
vary.
Stages/Displays and Icons
First Stage
Second Stage
The scoring system for points is
based on:
Braking and accelerating
Definition
A total of two leaves can be put on each plant icon.
A total of four leaves can be added to each plant icon.
A circular shaped icon, which represents a blossom, can be
added on top of each plant icon with four leaves.
Third Stage
Vehicle speed
ECON button usage
Idle duration
Maximum Score Icons
First
Stage
Second
Stage
Third
Stage
An icon appears once you have reached the maximum score for
each stage and are moving up to the next stage. These icons
appear briefly when the ignition switch is turned off.
Once the 3rd stage maximum score is reached, the system
continues to monitor your driving. If you maintain a fuel
efficient driving style, your score remains at the highest stage.
If you drive less efficiently, points will be deducted and you
may drop (stage down) to the previous stage.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
269
12/07/13 17:11:39 31TM8630_275
Eco Assist System
As you progress to a higher level, the
system monitors your driving style
more strictly. As a result, you must
further refine your driving style to
continue to move up to the next level.
TOC
The following are some of the
conditions that may affect
your score:
Before Driving
Extremely high or low ambient
temperature
Inconsistent acceleration use, such
as pumping the pedal repeatedly
within a short period of time
Frequent use of the climate
control system
Reset the System
The following procedure clears all
leaves and your lifetime points. This
procedure must be followed exactly.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Confirm that the ECON
mode is OFF. If it is OFF, proceed to
step 1. Do not run the engine.
If the ECON mode is on, press and
release the ECON button to turn it
off. You also need to turn the ignition
switch off.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
ON (II) position again. Do not run
the engine.
Complete the following steps within
30 seconds:
1. Press and release the brake
pedal at least two times. The
ambient meter color
changes from blue to green *.
2. Press and release the ECON
button two times (ECON mode
comes on, then goes off). The
ambient meter color goes off, and
the accumulated data is cleared.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Short distance trips
* : The ambient meter color changes only
if the multi- information display’s
meter color change setting is on. (See
page 103 .)
270
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:11:46 31TM8630_276
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
Honda’s Continuously Variable
Transmission’s unique design
provides a smooth, constant flow of
power. It is electronically controlled
for more precise operation and
better fuel economy.
Shift Lever Position Indicators
TOC
Before Driving
EX models
Insight and LX models
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
2013 Insight
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display.
271
12/07/13 17:11:52 31TM8630_277
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Shifting
Insight and LX models
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to S
S to L
L to S
S to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
TOC
Before Driving
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
To shift from:
Press the release button.
R to P
N to R
D to S
S to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
Move the lever.
To shift from Park to any position,
press the brake pedal, the release
button on the front of the shift lever,
then pull the lever. You cannot shift
out of Park when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
272
EX models
2013 Insight
P to R
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
12/07/13 17:11:59 31TM8630_278
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
TOC
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the front of the shift lever
to move it.
Before Driving
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 275 .
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and the release button on the
front of the shift lever to shift from
Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop, and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Always shift to the
Park position if you need to leave the
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from Neutral to
another position.
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically adjusts to
keep the engine at the best speed for
driving conditions. To help the
engine warm up faster, the
transmission will select ratios that
allow the engine to run at higher
speeds when it is cold.
Insight and LX models
Second (S) − To shift into the S
position, press the release button on
the front of the shift lever, and move
the lever to S. Selecting Second
shifts the transmission into a lower
range of ratios for better
acceleration and increased engine
braking. Use Second when you are
going down a steep hill.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
273
12/07/13 17:12:05 31TM8630_279
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
TOC
Insight and LX models
EX models
Low (L) − To shift to Low, press
the release button on the front of the
shift lever. Use Low to make better
use of engine power when climbing,
and for maximum engine braking
when going down steep hills.
Second (S) − To shift into the S
position, press the release button on
the front of the shift lever, and move
the lever to S. The S position is
similar to D, except the range of
ratios are different for better
acceleration and increased
engine braking.
Before Driving
For faster acceleration when in D, S,
or L, the transmission will
automatically ‘‘kick down’’ to a lower
range of ratios by pushing the
accelerator pedal to the floor.
274
With the shift lever in D or S, you
can also use the paddle shifters to
shift the transmission up or down.
With the paddle shifters, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal. For more information
on driving with the paddle shifters,
see page 276 .
2013 Insight
Speed Limiter
When the vehicle reaches the
maximum speed in any shift position,
you may feel the engine cut in and
out. This is caused by a limiter (112
mph, 180 km/h) in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
speed to below the maximum.
12/07/13 17:12:13 31TM8630_280
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
RELEASE BUTTON
1. Set the parking brake.
TOC
Before Driving
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
shift lock release slot cover to
prevent scratches. Using a small
flat-tip screwdriver or a metal
fingernail file, carefully pry on the
notch of the cover to remove it.
4. Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the left side. Insert the
key into the ignition switch, press
the brake pedal, and restart the
engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
2013 Insight
275
12/07/13 17:12:20 31TM8630_281
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Using the Paddle Shifters in the
D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
On EX models
TOC
Before Driving
When you are driving in the D
position, pulling either paddle shifter
switches from the D-normal shift
mode to the D-paddle shift mode.
You can shift the transmission up or
down through seven-stages manually
with the paddle shifters.
Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing, and provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
276
SHIFT INDICATOR
To shift up or down, use the +
(right) or − (left) paddle shifter on
either side of the steering wheel.
When you pull either paddle shifter,
the shift indicator shows you the
selected speed number.
Pull the + (right) paddle shifter to
upshift. Pull − (left) to downshift.
When the transmission returns to
ordinary automatic transmission
(CVT), the displayed shift
indicator disappears.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:12:25 31TM8630_282
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Downshifting with the − (left)
paddle shifter allows you to increase
the engine braking when going down
steep or long hills, and provides
more power when climbing uphills.
You can upshift the transmission
manually to reduce the rpm.
TOC
Before Driving
The transmission control system
monitors the accelerator pedal use
and your driving conditions. When
you press the accelerator pedal as in
the normal driving, the system
judges that you are driving at a
constant cruising speed without
using the paddle shifters. Under
these conditions, D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission automatically
returns to ordinary automatic
transmission (CVT).
To cancel the D-paddle shift mode
manually, pull and hold the + side
paddle shifter until the shift indicator
goes out.
The transmission remains in the
selected speed if you do not accelerate.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
277
12/07/13 17:12:32 31TM8630_283
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Each time you pull either paddle
shifter, the transmission shifts one
speed up or down. If you want to
shift up or down more than two
speeds, pull the paddle shifter twice,
pause, and then pull it again.
The automatic transmission (CVT)
will not allow you to shift if:
You downshift before the engine
speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed.
If you try to do this, the shift
indicator will flash the number of
the lower speed several times,
then return to a higher speed.
TOC
Before Driving
You upshift before the engine
speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed.
You pull both paddle shifters at
the same time.
You pull one of the two paddle
shifters with another paddle
shifter being pulled.
278
2013 Insight
The transmission downshifts to first
speed and returns to ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT) when
the vehicle comes to a complete stop
and the vehicle speed is about 6 mph
(10 km/h).
If there is a problem in the
transmission while you are driving
with the paddle shifters, the D
indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission returns to ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT).
12/07/13 17:12:40 31TM8630_284
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Using the Paddle Shifters in
the S position (7-Speed Manual
Shift Mode)
‘‘M’’ INDICATOR
On EX models
TOC
Before Driving
With the shift lever in the S position,
you can select the 7-speed manual
shift mode to shift speeds; much
like a manual transmission using
the paddle shifters, but without a
clutch pedal.
To enter the 7-speed manual shift
mode, press the release button on
the front of the shift lever, move the
lever to the S position, then pull
either paddle shifter. To cancel the
7-speed manual shift mode and
return to the ordinary automatic
transmission (CVT), move the shift
lever from the S position. When
moving the shift lever, be careful not
to operate incorrectly. While you are
driving in the 7-speed manual shift
mode, the transmission will not
automatically return to the ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT).
If you keep depressing the
accelerator pedal without pulling the
paddle shifter, the speed will be
automatically shifted up just before
the tachometer’s red zone.
The transmission also shifts
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
speed when the vehicle speed
reaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
SHIFT INDICATOR
When you move the shift lever from
the ‘‘D’’ to the ‘‘S’’ position and pull
either paddle shifter, the shift
indicator displays ‘‘M’’ along with the
selected speed number.
Downshifting with the − (left)
paddle shifter allows you to increase
the engine braking when going down
steep or long hills, and provides
more power when climbing uphills.
You can upshift the transmission
manually to reduce the rpm.
To upshift, pull the + (right) paddle
shifter. To downshift, pull the −
(left) paddle shifter.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
279
12/07/13 17:12:48 31TM8630_285
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
The automatic transmission (CVT)
will not allow you to shift if:
You downshift before the engine
speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed.
TOC
Before Driving
If you try to do this, the shift
indicator will flash the number of
the lower speed several times,
then return to a higher speed.
Recommended Shift Points
Drive in the highest speed number
that lets the engine run and
accelerate smoothly. This will give
you effective emissions control. The
following shift points are
recommended:
Shift up
Normal acceleration
You upshift before the engine
speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed.
1→2
15 mph (24 km/h)
2→3
25 mph (40 km/h)
You pull both paddle shifters at
the same time.
3→4
40 mph (64 km/h)
4→5
45 mph (72 km/h)
5→6
50 mph (81 km/h)
6→7
55 mph (89 km/h)
You pull one of the two paddle
shifters with another paddle
shifter being pulled.
280
2013 Insight
L (Low) mode − To shift to Low,
pull and hold both paddle shifters
simultaneously until you see L in the
shift indicator. Use Low to get more
power when climbing, and for
maximum engine braking when
going down steep hills.
12/07/13 17:12:59 31TM8630_286
Auto Idle Stop
To help maximize fuel economy,
your vehicle has an Auto Idle Stop
function. Depending on
environmental conditions and vehicle
operation, the engine will shut off
when you come to a stop.
TOC
Before Driving
The engine automatically stops when
the vehicle comes to a stop with the
shift lever in the D position and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine may also stop when
vehicle speed drops below 7 mph (11
km/h) with the brake pedal pressed.
While the auto idle stop function is
activated, the auto idle stop indicator
in the instrument panel blinks (see
page 283 ).
When the ECON mode is on, the
engine is more likely to stop than
when it is off (see page 127 ).
The engine will not stop automatically
under the following conditions:
Vehicle speed does not go above
9 mph (15 km/h) after
starting the engine.
The transmission fluid
temperature is low.
The vehicle is stopped with the
shift position in P, R, S, or L.
When the vehicle is stopped on an
incline.
The windshield defroster is on.
The fan speed is selected to high
(more than four steps on the
horizontal fan speed indicators).
The IMA battery charge is low.
The pointer of the charge/assist
gauge does not move when
accelerating or decelerating.
The engine coolant temperature
is low.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
281
12/07/13 17:13:10 31TM8630_287
Auto Idle Stop
The engine may not stop automatically
under the following conditions:
The ECON button is off, and there
is a significant difference between
the ambient temperature and the
temperature setting of the climate
control system.
TOC
The engine automatically
restarts when:
The engine coolant temperature
becomes low.
The brake pedal is released.
The pressure on the brake pedal is
repeatedly applied and released
slightly during a stop.
Under the following conditions, the
engine restarts even if the brake
pedal is pressed:
Before Driving
The climate control system is
dehumidifying the air.
The shift position is changed
to R or L.
The vehicle is stopped by braking
suddenly.
The accelerator pedal is pressed
When the ECON button is on, the
engine is more likely to stop. See
page 127 for the ECON button.
The pressure to the brake pedal is
reduced and the vehicle starts
moving while stopped on an incline.
The IMA battery charge
becomes low.
The windshield defroster button
is pressed.
282
2013 Insight
The ECON button is off, and the
difference between the ambient
temperature and the temperature
setting of the climate control
system becomes significant.
The climate control system starts
to dehumidify the interior
12/07/13 17:13:16 31TM8630_288
Auto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop Indicator
TOC
If the auto idle stop function turns
off the engine for a long time, the
charge of the IMA and 12 volt
batteries becomes low, and the
engine may not restart automatically.
Always turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position, set the
parking brake, and remove the key if
you are getting out of the vehicle.
The time that auto idle stop is
activated may be reduced if you
operate the windshield wipers with
the climate control system on.
Before Driving
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR
This indicator blinks when the auto
idle stop system is in operation. If
the driver’s door is opened while the
indicator is blinking, the buzzer
sounds to notify that the auto idle
stop system is active.
2013 Insight
283
12/07/13 17:13:24 31TM8630_289
Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
TOC
Before Driving
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Parking Tips
Make sure the windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lock the doors and the hatch.
LX and EX models
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill,
turn the front wheels away
from the curb.
284
2013 Insight
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward
the curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
12/07/13 17:13:29 31TM8630_290
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels are drum. A power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on
the brake pedal. The ABS helps you
retain steering control when braking
very hard.
TOC
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their
effectiveness. Use the engine to
assist the brakes by taking your foot
off the accelerator and downshifting
to a lower speed.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
Before Driving
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.
2013 Insight
285
12/07/13 17:13:36 31TM8630_291
Braking System
TOC
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
The following features are
also equipped:
Creep Aid System
With the shift lever in D, S or L, this
feature applies brake pressure
briefly as you release the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from
moving unexpectedly.
Before Driving
Brake-Assist
This feature helps you apply the
brakes with less force during an
emergency braking situation.
286
2013 Insight
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
12/07/13 17:13:44 31TM8630_292
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
TOC
Before Driving
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
When the ABS indicator comes on,
you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page 366 .
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
287
12/07/13 17:13:50 31TM8630_293
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
TOC
Before Driving
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 366 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear
wheels to lock up and possibly
lead to a loss of control.
288
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with steering
control during braking.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a
safe speed for the road and
weather conditions.
2013 Insight
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
or snow, than a vehicle without
anti-lock.
12/07/13 17:13:58 31TM8630_294
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. models only
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
TOC
Before Driving
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE’’ message on the
multi-information display.
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
You should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure
as indicated on the vehicle’s tire
information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the
recommended pressure.
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator and
message on the multi-information
display go out after inflating the
tires to the specified values, have
your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 348 ).
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
289
12/07/13 17:14:06 31TM8630_295
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TOC
Before Driving
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
you check and adjust your tire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
the tires may become overinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
Each tire, including the spare,
should be checked monthly
when the vehicle is cold, and set
to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the vehicle
placard and in the owner’s
manual (see page 339 ).
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
you will see the above message on
the multi-information display.
Refer to page 338 for tire inflation
guidelines.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see TPMS System Failure).
290
TPMS System Failure
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:14:13 31TM8630_296
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash, then stays
on (see page 289 ).
TOC
Before Driving
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multiinformation display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page 294 ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator will come
on. Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 349 ).
After the flat tire is replaced with
the spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the
spare tire pressure. Manually check
the spare tire pressure to be sure it
is correct.
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
Each wheel (except the compact
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor. You must use
TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
291
12/07/13 17:14:17 31TM8630_297
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
This device complies with the
appropriate requirements or the
required standards. See page 392 for
more information.
TOC
Before Driving
292
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:14:27 31TM8630_298
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
TOC
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
Before Driving
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
VSA OFF Indicator
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA system indicator blink.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
The VSA system indicator will also
come on when there is a problem in
the hill start assist system. For more
information, see page 295 .
NOTE: The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.
When the VSA system indicator
comes on, you will also see a
‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ or
‘‘CHECK HILL START ASSIST
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
2013 Insight
293
12/07/13 17:14:34 31TM8630_299
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
On U.S. models
TOC
Before Driving
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on (see page 289 ),
or the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message with the indicator flashing
(see page 290 ), the VSA system
automatically turns on even if the
VSA system is turned off with the
VSA OFF switch. In this case, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
VSA OFF Switch
VSA OFF
SWITCH
This switch is under the driver’s
side vent. To turn the VSA system
on and off, press and hold it until
you hear a beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
294
2013 Insight
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you
turned it off the last time you drove
the vehicle.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
12/07/13 17:14:42 31TM8630_300
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 342 ).
TOC
Before Driving
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you
would if your vehicle was not
equipped with VSA.
Hill Start Assist System
Your vehicle is equipped with a hill
start assist feature to help prevent
the vehicle from rolling on inclines
as you move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator.
To activate hill start assist, you must
come to a complete stop and make
sure the shift lever is in any of D, S
or L (either in D or S on models with
the paddle shifters) when facing
uphill, or reverse when facing
downhill. Release the brake pedal.
The brakes remain engaged briefly
to keep the vehicle from rolling
forward or backward while
you move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal.
Gently apply the accelerator
pedal as in normal driving. Hill start
assist will release brake pressure
gradually as you accelerate.
2013 Insight
Hill start assist may not prevent your
vehicle from rolling downhill on a
very steep or slippery slope, and will
not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement
for the parking brake. If parking
your vehicle, ensure that the
transmission is in Park, and the
parking brake is fully applied before
exiting the vehicle. You should also
turn off the engine before
exiting the vehicle.
The VSA system indicator will come
on when there is a problem in the hill
start assist system. With the VSA
system indicator on, the hill start
assist system will not activate.
Hill start assist will still operate even
when VSA is switched off.
295
12/07/13 17:14:45 31TM8630_301
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
trailer. Attempting to do so can void
your warranties.
TOC
Before Driving
296
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:14:50 31TM8630_302
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
Maintenance Minder messages on
the multi-information display, and
instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want
to take care of yourself.
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
2013 Insight
297
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 397 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 298
Maintenance MinderTM.................. 299
Fluid Locations............................... 309
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 310
Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 312
Engine Coolant ............................... 315
Windshield Washers ..................... 317
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 318
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ............. 318
Brake Fluid ..................................... 319
Lights .............................................. 321
Audio Antenna ............................... 331
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 331
Floor Mats ...................................... 331
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 332
Wiper Blades .................................. 332
Tires ................................................ 338
Checking the 12 Volt Battery ....... 344
Vehicle Storage .............................. 346
12/07/13 17:15:00 31TM8630_303
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in
this section should be performed
by a certified technician or
qualified mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
TOC
Maintenance
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
298
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
2013 Insight
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
12/07/13 17:15:07 31TM8630_304
Maintenance MinderTM
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the multi-information display to show
you when you should have your
dealer perform engine oil
replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
TOC
Based on the engine operating
conditions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the
remaining engine oil life
and displays it as a percentage.
Engine Oil Life Display
ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life
displayed on the multi-information
display, turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, and press the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the engine oil
life is displayed.
The remaining engine oil life is
shown on the display according to
this table:
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100% − 91%
90% − 81%
80% − 71%
70% − 61%
60% − 51%
50% − 41%
40% − 31%
30% − 21%
20% − 16%
15% − 11%
10% − 6%
5% − 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
15%
10%
5%
0%
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
299
12/07/13 17:15:14 31TM8630_305
Maintenance MinderTM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE(S)
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. Once
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
SUB ITEM(S)
Along with the message, the system
message indicator comes on (see
page 70 ).
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE(S)
TOC
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ message along with the
maintenance item code(s) indicating
the main and sub items required at
the time of the oil change. Refer to
page 308 for a complete list of the
maintenance main items and
sub items.
300
The message appears on the multiinformation display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
This message reminds you that your
vehicle will soon be due for
scheduled maintenance.
2013 Insight
MAIN ITEM(S)
REMAINING ENGINE
OIL LIFE
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life information. Along
with the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message, you
will see the percentage of the
remaining engine oil life and the
maintenance item codes on the
multi-information display.
12/07/13 17:15:20 31TM8630_306
Maintenance MinderTM
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. Once
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
Along with the message, the system
message indicator comes on (see
page 70 ).
TOC
Maintenance
When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1
percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
NOW’’ message with the same
maintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ was displayed with. When
you see this message, have the
indicated maintenance performed as
soon as possible.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘5%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the multi-information display
when the calculated engine oil life is
1−5 percent (see page 299 ).
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
301
12/07/13 17:15:26 31TM8630_307
Maintenance MinderTM
These messages will come on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 304 .
TOC
Maintenance
If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the remaining engine
oil life reaches 0%, the multiinformation display will show the
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’
and the maintenance item code(s).
This message is displayed when the
total distance traveled is less than 10
miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for
Canadian models) after the engine
oil life became 0%.
302
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. To see
the message again, press either
INFO button repeatedly.
Along with the message, the system
message indicator comes on (see
page 70 ).
2013 Insight
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘0%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the multi-information display
when the calculated engine oil life is
0−1 percent.
12/07/13 17:15:33 31TM8630_308
Maintenance MinderTM
NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED
U.S.
Canada
This message is displayed again
when you drive over 10 miles (for
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after seeing the 0% message.
U.S.
Canada
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 304 .
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
TOC
Maintenance
If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0%, the multiinformation display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total distance traveled after the
remaining oil life became 0%, and the
maintenance item code(s).
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. To see
the message again, press either
INFO button repeatedly.
2013 Insight
NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED
When you press the SEL/RESET
button to select the engine oil life,
the message ‘‘SERVICE,’’
along with the maintenance
item code(s) and the total negative
distance traveled after the oil life
became 0%, will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
303
12/07/13 17:15:42 31TM8630_309
Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Main Items
and Sub Items
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
TOC
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
ENGINE OIL LIFE
DISPLAY
Resetting the Engine Oil
Life Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS
All the maintenance items displayed
in the multi-information display are
in code.
For an explanation of the
maintenance codes, see page 308 .
304
2013 Insight
If maintenance service is done
by someone other than your
dealer, reset the Maintenance
Minder as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
12/07/13 17:15:48 31TM8630_310
Maintenance MinderTM
INFO BUTTONS (▲/▼)
SEL/RESET BUTTON
LX and EX models
TOC
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
DX model
INFO BUTTON
(▲/▼)
Maintenance
2. If the engine oil life is not displayed,
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly.
4. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press
the SEL/RESET button to reset
the engine oil life display. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multiinformation display.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
305
12/07/13 17:15:52 31TM8630_311
Maintenance MinderTM
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
TOC
Maintenance
306
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
2013 Insight
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
12/07/13 17:16:01 31TM8630_312
Maintenance MinderTM
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the multiinformation display.
TOC
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 249 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See
page 338 .
Lights − Check the operation of
all the lights monthly. See
page 321 .
Maintenance
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 250 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See
page 318 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 319 .
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
307
12/07/13 17:16:08 31TM8630_313
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance MinderTM
TOC
Symbol
A
B
Symbol
1
2
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*
Replace engine oil* and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
3
4
* : If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
5
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column
on page 307 .
NOTE:
308
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake
fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
2013 Insight
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
12/07/13 17:16:12 31TM8630_314
Fluid Locations
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
TOC
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
2013 Insight
309
12/07/13 17:16:17 31TM8630_315
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
TOC
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Maintenance
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour the
oil slowly and carefully so you do not
spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
310
2013 Insight
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 0W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
12/07/13 17:16:25 31TM8630_316
Adding Engine Oil
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
TOC
Maintenance
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
Ambient Temperature
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the multiinformation display.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
A very low-viscosity, fuel-efficient
0W-20 oil is the engine lubricant for
your Insight. This oil is formulated to
help your engine use less fuel.
2013 Insight
311
12/07/13 17:16:31 31TM8630_317
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the multiinformation display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service
station- type hydraulic lift for
this service. Unless you have the
knowledge and proper equipment,
you should have this maintenance
done by a skilled mechanic.
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
TOC
Maintenance
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap.
312
2013 Insight
SCREW
SCREWS
CLIP
3. Remove the screws with a Phillipshead screwdriver, and clips with a
flat-tip screwdriver, then pull the
under-cover down.
12/07/13 17:16:41 31TM8630_318
Changing the Oil and Filter
6. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the contacting surface
of a new oil filter.
BOLT
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
TOC
OIL FILTER
WASHER
Maintenance
4. Remove the oil drain bolt and
washer from the bottom of the
engine. Drain the oil into an
appropriate container.
5. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
8. Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
3.4 US qt (3.2 )
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
313
12/07/13 17:16:46 31TM8630_319
Changing the Oil and Filter
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
10.Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
11.Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
12.Put the under-cover back in place
and reinstall the holding clips and
screws. Lock the clips securely by
pushing on the center of each clip.
TOC
Maintenance
314
2013 Insight
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
12/07/13 17:16:53 31TM8630_320
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
TOC
RESERVE TANK
Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to between the
MIN and MAX lines. Inspect the
cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure
it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum
engines. Continued use of any nonHonda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
If you regularly drive your vehicle
under severe conditions in very low
temperature (under −31°F, −35°C), a
higher concentration of coolant should
be used. Consult your Honda dealer
f or more inf ormation on the proper
coolant.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
315
12/07/13 17:17:02 31TM8630_321
Engine Coolant
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
TOC
Maintenance
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
RADIATOR CAP
1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
316
2013 Insight
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
12/07/13 17:17:09 31TM8630_322
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
On all Canadian models
If the washer fluid is low, a ‘‘WASHER
FLUID LOW’’ message appears on the
multi-information display.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
TOC
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
Maintenance
On U.S. models
Check the fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at
the level gauge.
2013 Insight
317
12/07/13 17:17:17 31TM8630_323
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
TOC
HOT
Range
LOWER
MARK
DIPSTICK
Maintenance
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
318
UPPER
MARK
2013 Insight
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. There is a HOT
side and a COLD side on the
dipstick. The fluid level should be
between the upper and lower
marks on the HOT side.
12/07/13 17:17:25 31TM8630_324
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
TOC
Maintenance
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda CVTF
(continuously variable
transmission fluid).
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is indicated by a maintenance
message on the multi-information
display.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Brake Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
You will also see the ‘‘BRAKE
FLUID LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display when the brake
fluid level is low.
Independent of the Maintenance
Minder information, replace the
brake fluid every 3 years.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
319
12/07/13 17:17:30 31TM8630_325
Brake Fluid
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
TOC
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Maintenance
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
320
MAX
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:17:39 31TM8630_326
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area, readjustment may be
required. Adjustments should be
done by your dealer or another
qualified technician.
TOC
Maintenance
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb,
handle it by its base, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
High Beam Headlight
HOLDING CLIP
CONNECTOR
1. Open the hood.
To change the bulb on the right
side, remove the upper part of the
windshield washer reservoir tank.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clip, then
remove the upper part by pulling it
straight up.
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the cover by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the cover.
3. Remove the cover on the back of
the headlight assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
321
12/07/13 17:17:46 31TM8630_327
Lights
CONNECTOR
6. Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
BULB
7. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
COVER
TOC
Maintenance
4. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on
the tab and pulling the
connector down.
5. Remove the bulb from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
8. Reinstall the cover over the back
of the headlight assembly and turn
it clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the cover.
9. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
(Right side)
10.Install the upper part of the
windshield washer reservoir tank
in the reverse order of removal.
322
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:17:54 31TM8630_328
Lights
Low Beam Headlight
BULB
4. Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
5. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
TOC
CONNECTOR
Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
3. Remove the bulb from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2013 Insight
323
12/07/13 17:18:03 31TM8630_329
Lights
Replacing a Front
Parking Light Bulb
BULB
4. Install the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
HOLDING CLIP
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
SOCKET
TOC
Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
To change the bulb on the right
side, remove the upper part of the
windshield washer reservoir tank.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clip, then
remove the upper part by pulling it
straight up.
324
2. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
2013 Insight
(Right side)
6. Install the upper part of the
windshield washer reservoir tank
in the reverse order of removal.
12/07/13 17:18:12 31TM8630_330
Lights
Replacing the Front
Turn Signal Light Bulb
SOCKET
BULB
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
5. Insert the socket back into the
front turn signal light assembly.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
BOLTS
COVER
TOC
Maintenance
NOTCH
1. Place a cloth on the notch of the
light assembly garnish to prevent
scratches. Remove the cover by
carefully prying in the notch with a
flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the bolts and pull the
front turn signal light assembly
from the bumper while taking the
tab out from the holder.
7. Install the light assembly in the
reverse order of removal. Make
sure to secure the bolts.
8. Install the garnish in the original
position securely.
3. Remove the socket from the front
turn signal light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
2013 Insight
325
12/07/13 17:18:19 31TM8630_331
Lights
Replacing a Front
Side Marker Light Bulb
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
BULB
4. Install the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
TOC
Maintenance
SOCKET
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
326
2013 Insight
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
12/07/13 17:18:27 31TM8630_332
Lights
Replacing the Rear Bulbs
CLIP
HOOKS
TRIM
HOOKS
CLIP
TOC
Maintenance
1. Open the hatch.
2. Push on the area of the trim as
shown in the illustration above to
detach the upper hooks from the
light assembly.
3. Pry on the gap between the trim
and light assembly carefully with a
flat-tip screwdriver to detach the
lower hooks.
4. Make sure that all hooks are
removed from the light assembly.
Unclip the top half of the trim
from the body by pulling it out.
Then unclip the bottom half.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
327
12/07/13 17:18:36 31TM8630_333
Lights
BOLT
Front
Left side
Front
BULB
ORIGINAL
POSITION
TOC
Maintenance
5. Remove the two mounting bolts
with an 8 mm wrench.
Left side
6. Pull the rear of the light assembly
out as shown in the illustration
above ( ), then push the
assembly back to the original
position carefully ( ). The front
part of the rear light assembly
raises slightly ( ).
7. Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: back-up light,
turn signal, or side marker.
328
2013 Insight
SOCKET
SNAP FASTENERS
8. Pull the whole light assembly
outwards from the body carefully.
9. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
10.Remove the burned out bulb by
pulling it straight out of its socket.
12/07/13 17:18:43 31TM8630_334
Lights
11.Install the new bulb in the socket
by pushing it straight in the socket
until it bottoms.
12.Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly. Turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
13.Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
TOC
Maintenance
14.When reinstalling the taillight
assembly, align and pop the snap
fasteners in place. Reinstall and
tighten the two mounting bolts.
15.To reinstall the trim, set the
bottom edge of the trim in the
original position and push the
bottom half of the trim to clip it
back securely. Then push the
upper half of the trim to secure
the top clip.
2013 Insight
16.Secure the hooks by pushing on
the areas of the trim as shown in
the illustration above.
329
12/07/13 17:18:49 31TM8630_335
Lights
Stop/taillights
The stop/taillights should be
replaced by your dealer.
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
The license plate has two lights
above it. The bulbs should be
replaced by your dealer.
Side Turn Signal Lights
EX models
Each outside mirror has side turn
signal lights. The lights should be
replaced by your dealer.
High-mount Brake Light
The high-mount brake light should
be replaced by your dealer.
TOC
Maintenance
330
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:18:59 31TM8630_336
Audio Antenna, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Audio Antenna
Cleaning the Seat Belts
Floor Mats
LOOP
To unlock
TOC
Driver’s floor mat is shown.
Maintenance
Before using an automatic car
wash, remove the audio antenna
so it does not get damaged. Remove
the antenna by unscrewing it.
When you reinstall the antenna,
tighten it securely.
Before entering or parking
in areas with low ceiling height,
remove the antenna.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
2013 Insight
On LX and EX models
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. To lock each
anchor, turn the knob clockwise.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward and possibly interfering with
the pedals.
When cleaning or replacing, turn the
knob counterclockwise to unhook
CONTINUED
the floor mat.
331
12/07/13 17:19:05 31TM8630_337
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
TOC
Maintenance
Make sure the rear floor
mats are properly positioned. If
not, the floor mat will interfere
with the seat operation and make
the front passenger’s weight
sensors ineffective.
332
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the climate
control system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the multiinformation display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the climate control system becomes
less than usual.
2013 Insight
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they
leave streaks and unwiped areas
when used.
12/07/13 17:19:14 31TM8630_338
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM
WIPER ARMS
TOC
Maintenance
To replace a wiper blade:
1. Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
COVER
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Put a cloth on the edge of the
lock tab to prevent scratches,
then push up on the lock tab
carefully with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Pivot the blade assembly toward
the wiper arm until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
333
12/07/13 17:19:21 31TM8630_339
Wiper Blades
BLADE
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the
new blade.
BLADE
TOC
Maintenance
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
5. Place the top of the wiper blade
on the end of the blade assembly,
and slide the blade onto the
assembly. Make sure the blade
is completely installed.
REINFORCEMENT
Make sure the two rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
334
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:19:29 31TM8630_340
Wiper Blades
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
REAR
7. Make sure the blade is completely
installed and that its edge is not
bunched up.
8. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
COVER
TOC
Maintenance
To replace a rear wiper blade:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the
rear window.
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pulling up
the cover.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
335
12/07/13 17:19:36 31TM8630_341
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM
5. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the
new blade.
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
TOP
BLADE
TOC
Maintenance
3. Push the blade assembly toward
the base of the arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the
wiper blade or wiper arm
down on the windshield.
4. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Make sure the two rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
336
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:19:42 31TM8630_342
Wiper Blades
7. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
8. Make sure the blade is completely
installed and that its edge is not
bunched up.
9. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield.
TOC
Maintenance
6. Place the top of the wiper blade
on the end of the blade assembly,
and slide the blade onto the
assembly. Make sure the blade
is completely installed.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
337
12/07/13 17:19:53 31TM8630_343
Tires
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
TOC
Maintenance
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly
inflated provides the best
combination of handling,
tread life, and riding comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
On U.S. models
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 289 for
more information.
On all Canadian models
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
338
On U.S. models
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
2013 Insight
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km). Add or release air, if
needed, to match the recommended
cold tire pressures.
12/07/13 17:20:05 31TM8630_344
Tires
TOC
Maintenance
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles/kilometers), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will
be underinflated.
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire
problem and not due to a variation
between gauges.
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look
closely for punctures if a tire
starts losing pressure.
Tire Size
P185/60R15 84T
Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 382 .
2013 Insight
339
12/07/13 17:20:13 31TM8630_345
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
TOC
Maintenance
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
340
Tire Service Life
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 383 ).
2013 Insight
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
12/07/13 17:20:23 31TM8630_346
Tires
Tire Rotation
Front
TOC
Front
(Front Non-directional (Front Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
Maintenance
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the multi-information display. Move
the tires to the positions shown in
the illustration each time they are
rotated. If you purchase directional
tires, rotate only front-to-back.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of each wheel.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.
On U.S. models
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
341
12/07/13 17:20:33 31TM8630_347
Tires
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
TOC
Maintenance
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheels:
15 x 6J
Tires:
P185/60R15 84T
See page 382 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page 384
for tire size information.
342
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
Snow Tires
Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN
SC1026
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
2013 Insight
Tire Chains
12/07/13 17:20:40 31TM8630_348
Tires
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
TOC
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Maintenance
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
2013 Insight
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them
with the same solution, and rinse
them thoroughly.
If equipped
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat.
To clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
343
12/07/13 17:20:46 31TM8630_349
Checking the 12 Volt Battery
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
TOC
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Maintenance
Check the condition of the 12 volt
battery monthly by looking at the
test indicator window. The label on
the battery explains the test
indicator’s colors.
If additional 12 volt battery
maintenance is needed, see your
dealer or a qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
344
2013 Insight
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the IMA
battery level gauge reading will not
be correct the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It will show less than the
actual level temporarily. It will show
the correct level after you drive for
at least 30 minutes.
12/07/13 17:20:51 31TM8630_350
Checking the 12 Volt Battery
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting may be lost. To reset the time,
see page 220 .
TOC
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system may disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio, you will
see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see
page 219 ).
On vehicles with navigation system
The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
Maintenance
2013 Insight
345
12/07/13 17:21:01 31TM8630_351
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
TOC
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open
slightly (if the vehicle
is being stored indoors).
Maintenance
Fill the fuel tank.
Disconnect the 12 volt battery.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded
towel or rag so they do not
touch the windshield.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Block the rear wheels.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and hatch seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and hatch seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
346
2013 Insight
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Reconnect the 12 volt battery and
drive your vehicle every month for
about 30 minutes. This will keep
the IMA battery charged and in
good condition.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once
a month.
If this vehicle is unused f or over one
month, the service lif e of the 100V
Nickel-Metal Hydride battery will be
reduced and the battery may be
permanently damaged.
12/07/13 17:21:05 31TM8630_352
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
2013 Insight
Compact Spare Tire....................... 348
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 349
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 356
Jump Starting ................................. 358
If the Engine Overheats ............... 360
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 363
12 Volt Battery Charging System
Indicator ...................................... 364
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 365
Brake System Indicator ................ 366
Fuses ............................................... 367
Fuse Locations ............................... 372
Emergency Towing ....................... 374
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 375
347
12/07/13 17:21:13 31TM8630_353
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the air pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
TOC
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
348
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
On U.S. models
After the flat tire is replaced with
the spare tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator stays on
while driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on
again. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
TPMS SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display. This is
normal; the system cannot
monitor the spare tire pressure.
Manually check the spare tire
pressure to be sure it is correct.
2013 Insight
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement tire should be the same
size and design, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
12/07/13 17:21:21 31TM8630_354
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
TAB
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
HOLDER
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
FLOOR
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
3. Open the hatch.
4. Remove the cargo area floor by
carefully pulling the front edge of
the floor straight up.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
349
12/07/13 17:21:29 31TM8630_355
Changing a Flat Tire
JACK
BOX
SPARE TIRE
CASING
TOC
5. Take the box out of the spare tire.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
6. Take the spare tire casing out of
the cargo area.
7. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
350
SPARE TIRE
KNOB
COVER
8. Remove the jack compartment
cover by pulling the knob.
9. Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
2013 Insight
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
10.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
12/07/13 17:21:37 31TM8630_356
Changing a Flat Tire
JACKING POINTS
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT
WHEEL COVER
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
11.Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
Insight and LX models
12.Remove the wheel cover by
carefully prying under its edge
with the flat tip of the extension.
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
EXTENSION
13.Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off
the ground.
14.Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
351
12/07/13 17:21:43 31TM8630_357
Changing a Flat Tire
BRAKE HUB
16.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
17.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
15.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub
with a clean cloth. Wipe the
hub carefully; it may be hot
from driving.
352
18.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern.
Have the wheel nut torque
checked at the nearest
automotive service facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:21:52 31TM8630_358
Changing a Flat Tire
CARPET
BOX
WING BOLT
SPARE TIRE
CASING
CENTER CAP
EX models
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
19.Remove the center cap (if
equipped) before storing the flat
tire in the cargo area well.
20.Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
21.Remove the carpet from the
spare tire casing and store it in
the casing.
22.Install the spare tire casing in
the original position in the spare
tire well.
SPACER CONE
For normal tire
For compact
spare tire
23.Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
24.Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the box in the wheel of the
flat tire.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
353
12/07/13 17:21:58 31TM8630_359
Changing a Flat Tire
25.Store the tools in the spare tire
casing and the jack in its holder.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
clockwise to lock it in place, and
reinstall the cover.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
26.Store the center cap in the cargo
area. Make sure it does not get
scratched or damaged.
FLOOR
27.Place the cargo area floor in its
original position. Close the hatch.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
U.S. models only
28.Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
page 291 ).
354
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:22:05 31TM8630_360
Changing a Flat Tire
Installing a wheel cover
WIRE SUPPORT RING
CLIPS
TOC
CLIPS
Insight and LX models
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1. Make sure the wire support ring is
hooked into the clips around the
edge of the wheel cover.
2. Align the valve mark on the wheel
cover to the tire valve on the
wheel, then install the wheel cover.
2013 Insight
3. Make sure the wire support ring is
on the outer side of the tire valve
as shown.
355
12/07/13 17:22:11 31TM8630_361
If the Engine Won’t Start
The engine normally starts with the
IMA motor. If the engine does not
start while the IMA battery charge is
normally sufficient, check the
following:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 130 ).
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 263 .
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
356
2013 Insight
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 367 ).
12/07/13 17:22:16 31TM8630_362
If the Engine Won’t Start
When the IMA battery charge is low,
the starter motor is used to start the
engine. If the engine does not start,
check the following:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 358 .
TOC
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the 12 volt battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the 12 volt battery and terminal
connections (see page 344 ). You
can then try jump starting the
vehicle from a booster 12 volt
battery (see page 358 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 374 .
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 374 .
2013 Insight
357
12/07/13 17:22:23 31TM8630_363
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
TOC
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
358
To jump start your vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the 12 volt
battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical
accessories: climate control, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
2013 Insight
BOOSTER
BATTERY
The numbers in the illustration
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
12/07/13 17:22:31 31TM8630_364
Jump Starting
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (+) terminal on the
booster battery.
4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
359
12/07/13 17:22:36 31TM8630_365
Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats
If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the IMA
battery level gauge reading will not
be correct the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It will show less than the
actual level temporarily. It will show
the correct level after you drive for
at least 30 minutes.
If the Engine Overheats
The high temperature indicator
should be off under most conditions.
If the engine coolant temperature
gets higher than normal, the
indicator will blink. If it stays on, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
You will also see a ‘‘WATER TEMP
HOT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 67 ).
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
360
2013 Insight
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the high
temperature indicator blinking or
remaining on. Or you may see steam
or spray coming from under the
hood.
Driving with the high temperature
indicator on can cause serious damage
to your engine.
12/07/13 17:22:44 31TM8630_366
If the Engine Overheats
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
TOC
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
the accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
check the high temperature
indicator. If the high heat is due to
overloading, the engine should
start to cool down almost
immediately. If it does, wait until
the high temperature indicator
goes off, then continue driving.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
4. If the high temperature indicator
stays on, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 374 ).
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page 250),
Add coolant if the level is below
the MIN mark.
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the high
temperature indicator goes off
before checking the radiator.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
361
12/07/13 17:22:50 31TM8630_367
If the Engine Overheats
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pushing down, to the first stop.
After the pressure releases,
push down on the cap, and turn it
until it comes off.
362
9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘
’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as
you can.
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the high temperature indicator. If
it begins to blink or comes on
again, the engine needs repair
(see Emergency Towing on
page 374 ).
2013 Insight
11.If the temperature stays
normal, check the coolant
level in the radiator reserve
tank. If it has gone down,
add coolant to the MAX mark.
Put the cap back on tightly.
12/07/13 17:22:59 31TM8630_368
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The indicator notifies you of low oil
pressure and does not measure the
oil level. Check your vehicle’s oil
level at each refueling.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 249 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
The engine running generates the
oil pressure. When the Auto Idle
Stop is activated, the engine
is stopped, the oil pressure
is dropped, and the low oil pressure
indicator does not come on.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 310 ).
4. Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on
page 374 ).
2013 Insight
363
12/07/13 17:23:04 31TM8630_369
12 Volt Battery Charging System Indicator
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the 12
volt battery is not being charged.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 89 ).
TOC
This indicator may blink after you
start the vehicle in the morning
when the temperature is below
−20°F (−30°C). It will stop
blinking when the IMA battery
warms up.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or
garage where you can get
technical assistance.
364
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:23:12 31TM8630_370
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If the indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message on
the multi-information display.
Tighten the cap until it clicks at least
once (see page 247 ). Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It can take several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If you keep driving with the
Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you
can damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties. This indicator may also
come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 390 ).
Readiness Code
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
2013 Insight
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 89 .
365
12/07/13 17:23:19 31TM8630_371
Brake System Indicator
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. If you do not release the
parking brake, the indicator will stay
on, and you will see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 319 ).
However, if the brake pedal does
not feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down,
and you will have to press harder
on the pedal.
Slow down and pull to the side of the
road when it is safe. Because of the
long distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 374 ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
366
2013 Insight
If this indicator comes on for any
other reason, have your vehicle
inspected by your dealer. There
may be a malfunction with the
electric brake distribution (EBD)
system. Avoid hard braking and
high speed driving.
You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID
LOW’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 89 ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator comes on with
the brake system indicator, have
your vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.
12/07/13 17:23:26 31TM8630_372
Fuses
FUSE BOX
INTERIOR
COVER
LABEL
TOC
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
three fuse boxes.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The interior fuse box is behind the
dashboard on the driver’s side.
The interior fuse box label is
attached on the back side of the
cover. To see the interior fuse box
label, remove the cover by pulling it
toward you while holding the bottom
center part of cover.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
367
12/07/13 17:23:30 31TM8630_373
Fuses
UNDER-HOOD
(On the battery)
Next to the battery
TAB
TAB
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The under-hood fuse is on the
positive terminal of the battery. To
open it, push the tabs as shown.
368
The under-hood fuse box is located
next to the battery. To open it, push
the tab as shown.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:23:39 31TM8630_374
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
372 and 373 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
2. Remove the cover from the underhood fuse box located on the
battery (see page 368 ).
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box on the 12
volt battery by looking through
the top at the wire inside.
Replacement of these fuses should
be done by your dealer.
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the interior
fuse box.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
369
12/07/13 17:23:44 31TM8630_375
Fuses
BLOWN
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace the fuse
with one of the spare fuses of the
same rating or lower.
370
FUSE PULLER
The fuse puller is in the interior
fuse box.
2013 Insight
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate that anything is wrong.
Replace the fuse with one of the
correct rating as soon as you can.
12/07/13 17:23:48 31TM8630_376
Fuses
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
When the audio system is disabled,
the clock setting in the audio system
is canceled. You need to reset the
clock according to the instructions in
the audio system section in this
owner’s manual.
2013 Insight
371
12/07/13 17:23:54 31TM8630_377
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
372
No. Amps.
Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
15 A
(7.5 A)
20 A
−
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
18
20 A
19
20 A
20
21
22
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
Back Up
TPMS*
Driver’s Power Window
Not Used
Back Up Light
SRS
Transmission SOL
OPDS
Not Used
A/C
ABS/VSA
IMA
ACC Socket
Accessory
Daytime Running Light
Rear Wiper
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Rear Passenger’s Side
Power Window
Rear Driver’s Side Power
Window
Fuel Pump
Washer
Meter
2013 Insight
No. Amps.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
10 A
10 A
−
10 A
30 A
20 A
10 A
30 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
30 A
15 A
15 A
−
−
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
* : U.S. models
Circuits Protected
Hazard
Stop/Horn
Not Used
LAF
Door Lock Main
Headlight Main
Small Light
Radiator Fan Motor
IGPS
Right Headlight Low Beam
IG Coil
Left Headlight Low Beam
Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock)
Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock)
ABS/VSA FSR
Selectable Door Lock
IGP
Not Used
Not Used
IMA 1
MG Clutch
STS
12/07/13 17:24:03 31TM8630_378
Fuse Locations
No. Amps.
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
7.5 A
−
30 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
−
10 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
−
50 A
Circuits Protected
Hatch Lock
Not Used
Condenser Fan Motor
Left Headlight High Beam
Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock)
Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock)
Right Headlight High Beam
DBW
IMA 2
Not Used
Heated Mirror*2, *3
Front Wiper
Blower Motor
ABS/VSA Motor
Rear Defogger*1
Rear Defogger*2, *3
Not Used
IG Main
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES
On the battery
No. Amps.
1
2
3
100 A
60 A
20 A
Next to the battery
Circuits Protected
Battery, Main, ACG
EPS
Horn, Stop, Hazard
No. Amps.
1
2
15 A
15 A
Circuits Protected
Ignition Coil (EX)
Ignition Coil (IN)
*1 : Insight model and U.S. LX model
*2 : Canadian models
*3 : EX models
2013 Insight
373
12/07/13 17:24:12 31TM8630_379
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It
is very dangerous.
There are two ways to tow your
vehicle:
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
TOC
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Start the engine.
Shift to the D position and hold for
5 seconds, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front) and lift them
off the ground. The other two tires
remain on the ground. This is an
acceptable way to tow your vehicle.
374
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported with the f ront wheels of f
the ground.
2013 Insight
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
12/07/13 17:24:20 31TM8630_380
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
TOC
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see page 374 ).
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
To use the towing hook:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1. Remove the cover from the front
bumper using your fingers, or pry
it off using a cloth and a flat-tip
screwdriver to prevent scratches.
2. Remove the towing hook and
wheel nut wrench from the tool
case in the cargo area.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
375
12/07/13 17:24:24 31TM8630_381
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
TOC
Taking Care of the Unexpected
3. Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
376
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:24:28 31TM8630_382
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 378
Specifications ................................. 380
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 382
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ................................... 382
Treadwear .................................. 382
Traction....................................... 382
Temperature .............................. 383
Tire Labeling .................................. 383
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation............................. 385
2013 Insight
Emissions Controls........................ 387
The Clean Air Act ...................... 387
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 387
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 387
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 387
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 388
PGM-FI System ..................... 388
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 388
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 388
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 388
Replacement Parts..................... 388
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 389
Emissions Testing ......................... 390
Devices that Emit Radio Waves... 392
377
12/07/13 17:24:33 31TM8630_383
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
TOC
Technical Information
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
COVER
The VIN is also located on the
engine bulkhead. Remove the cover
on the engine compartment
bulkhead to view the VIN. Always
close the cover when finished.
378
CERTIFICATION LABEL
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:24:37 31TM8630_384
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The IMA Motor Number is stamped
on the motor housing.
ENGINE NUMBER
IMA MOTOR NUMBER
TOC
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Technical Information
2013 Insight
379
12/07/13 17:24:52 31TM8630_385
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Rear
TOC
Engine
Type
Technical Information
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
380
Capacities
Fuel tank
172.3 in (4,377 mm)
66.7 in (1,695 mm)
56.2 in (1,427 mm)
100.4 in (2,550 mm)
58.3 in (1,481 mm)
58.0 in (1,472 mm)
Change*1
Total
Change*2
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Change
Automatic
transmission Total
fluid (CVTF)
U.S. Vehicles
Windshield
Canada Vehicles
washer
reservoir
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
5
2
3
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
i-VTEC gasoline engine with
Hybrid Electric Motor
2.87 x 3.15 in (73.0 x 80.0 mm)
82 cu-in (1,339 cm )
10.8 : 1
DILFR6J11 (NGK)
Approx.
10.6 US gal (40 )
1.165 US gal (4.41 )
1.295 US gal (4.90 )
3.4 US qt (3.2
3.2 US qt (3.0
4.0 US qt (3.8
3.0 US qt (2.8
5.5 US qt (5.2
)
)
)
)
)
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
4.76 US qt (4.50 )
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.116 US gal (0.44 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:25:15 31TM8630_386
Specifications
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant oil type
Lights
Headlights
TOC
Technical Information
High
Low
Front turn signal lights
Front parking lights
Front side marker lights
Side turn signal lights
(door mirror)*1
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/taillights
Back-up lights
Rear side marker lights
License plate lights
Spot lights*1, *3
Ceiling light
Cargo area light
High-mount brake light
Glove box light*1
HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.8−17.6 oz (450−500 g)
SP-10
12 Volt Battery
Capacity
Fuses
Interior
12 V − 60 W (HB3)
12 V − 55 W (H11)
12 V − 21 W (Amber)
12 V − 5 W
12 V − 5 W
LED type*2
12 V − 21 W (Amber)
LED type*2
12 V − 16 W
12 V − 2 CP
12 V − 5 W
12 V − 8 W
12 V − 8 W
12 V − 5 W
LED type*2
12 V − 3.4 W
See page 372 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the steering
column.
See page 373 or the fuse box
cover.
Under-hood
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Tires
Size
Pressure
12 V − 35 AH/20 HR
12 V − 28 AH/5 HR
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
0 ± 0.12 in (0 ± 3 mm)
in 0.10 ± 0.10 in (2.5 ± 2.5 mm)
0° ± 1°
−1.5° ± 1°
3°30’ ± 0.5°
P185/60R15 84T
T135/80D15 99M
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
*1 : EX models
*2 : Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.
*3 : LX model
2013 Insight
381
12/07/13 17:25:23 31TM8630_387
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
TOC
Technical Information
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
382
2013 Insight
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
12/07/13 17:25:31 31TM8630_388
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling
TOC
Technical Information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade
for this tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
(1)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1) Tire Size
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure
(4) Maximum Tire Load
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
383
12/07/13 17:25:46 31TM8630_389
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
84 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
T
− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
2KNR − Tire type code.
2202
− Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
Glossary of Tire Terminology
P185/60R15 84T
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
P
− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
185 − Tire width in millimeters.
TOC
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Technical Information
R
− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
DOT EUYU 2KNR 2202
DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
15 − Rim diameter in inches.
EUYU − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
384
2013 Insight
Cold Tire Pressure − The tire air
pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating − Means the maximum
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure − The
maximum tire air pressure that the
tire can hold.
12/07/13 17:25:55 31TM8630_390
Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Maximum Load Rating − Means the
load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure −
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) −
Means the projections within the
principal grooves designed to give a
visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread.
TOC
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation
U.S. models only
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
Technical Information
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle
has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPM S) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is
significantly under- inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
CONTINUED
2013 Insight
385
12/07/13 17:26:00 31TM8630_391
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
TOC
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Technical Information
386
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
2013 Insight
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
12/07/13 17:26:08 31TM8630_392
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not
contribute to smog creation, but it
is a poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
*
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply with
the Canadian emission requirements, as
specified in an agreement with
Environment Canada, at the time they
are manufactured.
TOC
Technical Information
Crankcase Emissions
Control System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
2013 Insight
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Evaporative Emissions
Control System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling
Vapor Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
387
12/07/13 17:26:17 31TM8630_393
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way
catalytic converter. These four
systems work together to control
the engine’s combustion and
minimize the amount of HC, CO,
and NOx that come out the tailpipe.
The exhaust emissions control
systems are separate from the
crankcase and evaporative
emissions control systems.
TOC
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System
The exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) system takes some of the
exhaust gas and routes it back
into the intake manifold. Adding
exhaust gas to the air/fuel mixture
reduces the amount of NOx
produced when the fuel is burned.
Technical Information
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control.
The powertrain control module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls
how much fuel to inject under
all operating conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
388
2013 Insight
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate
from the rest of your vehicle.
Read your warranty manual for
more information.
12/07/13 17:26:24 31TM8630_394
Three Way Catalytic Converter
TOC
Technical Information
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away
from high grass, dry leaves, or
other flammables.
U.S. model is shown.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
The defective three way catalytic
converters contribute to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s
performance. Follow these
guidelines to protect your vehicle’s
three way catalytic converters.
2013 Insight
389
12/07/13 17:26:32 31TM8630_395
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain
‘‘readiness codes’’ that must be set
in the on- board diagnostics for the
emissions systems. These codes are
erased when the battery
is disconnected, and set again only
after several days of driving under a
variety of conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank
is nearly, but not completely,
full (around 3/4).
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
TOC
Technical Information
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
390
2013 Insight
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there for about 3 minutes.
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for
20 seconds.
12/07/13 17:26:36 31TM8630_396
Emissions Testing
TOC
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60
mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least
20 minutes. Drive on the
highway in D. Do not use the
cruise control. When traffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because
of traffic conditions, drive for at
least 30 seconds, then repeat it
two more times (for a total of
90 seconds).
8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow,
let the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the
brake pedal.
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for
30 minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Technical Information
2013 Insight
391
12/07/13 17:26:43 31TM8630_397
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems
on your vehicle emit radio waves
when in operation.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Immobilizer System
Remote Transmitter
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
TOC
Technical Information
Each of the above complies with the
appropriate requirements or the
required standards of FCC (Federal
Communications Commission) and
Industry Canada Standard, described
as follows:
392
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:26:46 31TM8630_398
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 394
Warranty Coverages ..................... 395
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 396
Authorized Manuals ...................... 397
Warranty and Customer Relations
2013 Insight
393
12/07/13 17:26:54 31TM8630_399
Customer Service Information
Warranty and Customer Relations
TOC
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
Canadian Owners:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Honda
Customer Service.
In Puerto Rico and the
U.S. Virgin Islands:
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Your name, address, and telephone number
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-Mail: honda_cr@ch.honda.com
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 378 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Tel: (800) 999-1009
394
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:27:02 31TM8630_400
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by
these warranties:
Warranty and Customer Relations
TOC
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the emissions control systems and
accessories, against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type
of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
2013 Insight
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser
of the muffler owns the vehicle
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2013 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2013 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
395
12/07/13 17:27:08 31TM8630_401
Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty and Customer Relations
TOC
In the US
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also
inform Transport Canada.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and
remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot
become involved in individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may:
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and
Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more
information on reporting safety defects or about motor
vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety.
go to http://www.saf ercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
396
2013 Insight
12/07/13 17:27:17 31TM8630_402
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www.helminc.com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Authorized Manuals
Publication
Form Number
61TM803
61TM803EL
61TM830
31TM8630
31TM8830
31TM8M30
31TM8Q30
31TM8S00
HON-R
Form Description
2013 Honda Insight Service Manual
2013 Honda Insight
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2013 Model Series Honda Insight
Body Repair Manual
2013 Honda Insight Owner’s Manual
2013 Honda Insight
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2013 Honda Insight Honda Service History
2013 Honda Insight
Technology Reference Guide (LX/EX)
2013 Honda Insight
Technology Reference Guide (EX with Navigation)
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired
Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
2013 Insight
397
12/07/23 10:21:22 31TM8630_404
Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
Accessories..................................... 254
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ...................................... 131
Accessory Power Socket .............. 155
Active Head Restraints ................. 144
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 311
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 10, 25
Airbags, Additional Information .... 25
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Advanced Airbag System ........... 30
Airbag Service .............................. 36
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 35
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 34
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 33
SRS Components ......................... 25
Air Conditioning System ............... 162
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 339
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Ambient Meter ................................. 72
Antifreeze ....................................... 315
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 64, 287
Operation .................................... 287
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 219
Anti-theft Steering Column
Lock ............................................. 131
Armrest ........................................... 146
Audio System ................................. 168
Auto Door Locking ........................ 109
Auto Door Unlocking .................... 110
Auto Idle Stop ................................. 281
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 23
Automatic Speed Control.............. 222
Automatic Transmission (CVT) .. 271
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 380
Checking Fluid Level ................ 318
Paddle Shifters in the
D Position ............................... 276
Paddle Shifters in the
S Position ................................ 279
Recommended Shift Points ...... 280
Shifting ........................................ 272
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 271
2013 Insight
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Shift Lever Positions ................. 273
Shift Lock Release ..................... 275
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 218
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 63, 364
Jump Starting ............................. 358
Maintenance ............................... 344
Specifications ............................. 381
Before Driving ............................... 243
Belts, Seat ..................................... 9, 21
Beverage Holder ............................ 154
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ........ 225
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 287
Break-in, New Linings .............. 244
Bulb Replacement ..................... 330
Fluid ............................................ 319
Pad Wear Indicator.................... 286
Parking ........................................ 151
System Indicator ............ 63, 64, 366
CONTINUED
I
12/07/23 10:21:26 31TM8630_405
Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Braking System.............................. 285
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 244
Brightness Control,
Instruments ................................ 124
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 327
Brake Lights............................... 330
Front Side Marker Lights......... 326
Front Turn Signal Lights .......... 325
Headlights .................................. 321
Parking Lights ........................... 324
Rear Turn Signal Lights ........... 327
Specifications ............................. 381
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 321
C
Cargo Area Light ........................... 160
Capacities Chart............................. 380
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
Carrying Cargo .............................. 256
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
Ceiling Light ................................... 159
Center Pockets............................... 157
Center Tray .................................... 156
Certification Label ......................... 378
II
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Chains ............................................. 342
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 349
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 312
When to....................................... 299
Charging System Indicator .... 63, 364
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 262
Child Safety ...................................... 38
Child Seats
LATCH Anchor System .............. 47
Lower Anchor .............................. 47
Tether Anchor ............................. 51
Childproof Door Locks ................. 134
Climate Control .............................. 162
Clock, Setting the .......................... 220
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 387
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 263
Compact Spare ............................... 348
Console Compartment .................. 155
Controls, Instruments and .............. 59
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 315
Checking ..................................... 250
Proper Solution .......................... 315
Temperature Indicator................ 67
2013 Insight
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 387
Cruise Control Operation ............. 222
Customer Service .......................... 394
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 60
Daytime Running Lights............... 123
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 396
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 126
Defrosting the Windows....... 165, 166
Dimensions ..................................... 380
Dimming the Headlights .............. 120
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 318
Engine Oil ................................... 249
Directional Signals......................... 120
Disc Brake Pad Wear
Indicators .................................... 286
Disc Player ............................. 173, 188
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 314
12/07/23 10:21:32 31TM8630_406
Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Doors
Auto Door Locking .................... 109
Auto Door Unlocking ................ 110
Childproof Door Locks ............. 134
Locking and Unlocking ............. 133
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 382
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 261
Economy ..................................... 251
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 332
E
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator............................ 62, 363
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 62, 365
Overheated Engine ................... 360
Emergency Brake .......................... 151
Emergency Flashers ..................... 125
Emergency Hatch Opener............ 140
Emergency Towing ....................... 374
Emissions Controls........................ 387
Emissions Testing ......................... 390
Engine
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 315
Coolant Temperature
Indicator .................................... 67
If It Won’t Start .......................... 356
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 62, 365
Oil Life Display .......................... 299
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 363
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 310
Overheating................................ 360
Specifications ............................. 380
Speed Limiter ............................. 274
Starting........................................ 263
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 387
2013 Insight
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Index
Y
Z
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 56
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 19
F
Fan, Interior.................................... 164
Features .......................................... 161
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 245
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 332
Oil ................................................ 313
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 125
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 349
Floor Mats ...................................... 331
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 318
Brake ........................................... 319
Windshield Washer ................... 317
FM Stereo Radio
Reception .................................... 212
Four-way Flashers ......................... 125
Front Airbags ............................. 10, 25
CONTINUED
III
INDEX
Eco Assist System ......................... 264
Ecological Drive Display ................. 81
ECON Button ................................. 127
ECON Mode ................................... 127
Economy, Fuel ............................... 251
Emergencies on the Road............. 347
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 358
Brake System Indicator ...... 63, 366
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 349
Charging System
Indicator............................ 63, 364
Checking the Fuses................... 369
H
12/07/13 17:27:39 31TM8630_407
Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Fuel .................................................. 244
Fill Door and Cap....................... 245
Gauge ............................................ 73
Octane Requirement ................. 244
Oxygenated ................................ 244
Reserve Indicator......................... 70
Tank, Filling the......................... 245
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 369
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 251
Gasoline .......................................... 244
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 70
Gauge ............................................ 73
Octane Requirement ................. 244
Tank, Filling the......................... 245
Gas Station Procedures................. 245
Gauges
Charge/Assist .............................. 74
Fuel ................................................ 73
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 271
Automatic Transmission........... 271
Glove Box ....................................... 156
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 321
HandsFreeLink ............................ 225
Hatch ............................................... 139
Opening....................................... 139
Open Indicator ............................. 68
Hazard Warning Flashers............. 125
Headlights
Aiming ......................................... 321
Daytime Running Lights .......... 123
High Beam Indicator ................... 69
Reminder Beeper....................... 121
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 321
Turning on .................................. 121
Head Restraints ............................. 142
Heated Mirrors .............................. 148
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 263
High-Low Beam Switch ................ 120
Hill Start Assist System ................ 295
Hood, Opening the ........................ 248
Horn..................................................... 4
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 378
IV
2013 Insight
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Ignition
Keys............................................. 129
Switch .......................................... 131
Timing Control System ............. 388
IMA System Power Flow
Monitor ......................................... 84
Immobilizer System....................... 130
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 62
Indicators, Messages (MID) .... 62, 89
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 64
Auto Idle Stop............................... 66
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 63, 366
Cruise Control .............................. 69
Cruise Main .................................. 69
Door/Hatch Open ................. 12, 68
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights)..................................... 123
EPS (Electric Power Steering) .. 68
ECON Mode ................................. 71
High Beam.................................... 69
High Temperature (Coolant) ..... 67
IMA Battery Level ....................... 85
IMA System.................................. 66
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 63
12/07/23 10:21:38 31TM8630_408
Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Inflation, Recommended Tire ...... 338
Pressures .................................... 339
Information Display ......................... 72
Inside Mirror .................................. 147
Inspection, Tire .............................. 339
Instrument Panel ............................. 61
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 124
Interior Lights ................................ 159
Introduction ......................................... i
iPod ................................................ 195
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 351
Jack, Tire ........................................ 350
Jump Starting ................................. 358
K
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
LATCH Anchorage System............ 47
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 321
Indicator ........................................ 69
Parking ........................................ 120
Turn Signal ........................... 69, 120
Load Limits..................................... 257
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 131
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 131
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 245
Hatch ........................................... 139
Power Door ................................ 133
Low Coolant Level ......................... 250
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 70
Lower Anchors................................. 47
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 363
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 380
Keys ................................................. 129
L
Label, Certification ........................ 378
Lane Change, Signaling ................ 121
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 17, 22
2013 Insight
INDEX
Indicators, Messages (MID)
Lights On ...................................... 69
Low Fuel ....................................... 70
Low Oil Pressure ................. 62, 363
Low Temperature (Coolant) ...... 67
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS ................................ 66, 289
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 365
Security System ........................... 70
Side Airbag Off ............................ 65
Seat Belt .................................. 21, 62
SRS .......................................... 34, 64
System Message .......................... 70
TPMS ............................ 66, 289, 290
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 69
12 Volt Battery Charging
System............................... 63, 364
VSA Off ......................................... 65
VSA System .................................. 65
Infant Restraint ................................ 43
Infant Seats
LATCH Anchorage System ....... 47
Lower Anchors ............................ 47
Tether Anchors............................ 51
H
CONTINUED
V
12/07/23 10:21:44 31TM8630_409
Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
M
Maintenance ................................... 297
Main Items and Sub Items ....... 304
Minder......................................... 299
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 307
Safety........................................... 298
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 365
Meters, Gauges.......................... 61, 72
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 244
Mirrors ............................................ 147
Adjusting..................................... 147
Heated ......................................... 148
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 273
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 244
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 378
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 244
Odometer .......................................... 79
VI
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 312
Change, When to ....................... 299
Checking Engine ....................... 249
Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 363
Selecting Proper Viscosity........ 311
ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 132
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 387
Outside Mirrors ............................. 147
Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 80
Overheating, Engine ..................... 360
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 307
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 244
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
PGM-FI System.............................. 388
Playing the Radio ................... 169, 181
Playing a Disc ......................... 173, 188
Playing an iPod ............................. 195
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ......................................... 202
Pollen Filter .................................... 332
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 19
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 12
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19
Protecting Children ......................... 38
Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Protecting Larger Children ........ 52
Protecting Small Children .......... 44
P Q
Paddle Shifters ............................... 276
Panel Brightness Control ............. 124
Park Gear Position......................... 273
Parking ............................................ 284
Parking Brake ................................ 151
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 63, 366
Parking Lights................................ 120
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 284
2013 Insight
R
Radiator Overheating .................... 360
Radio/Disc/Sound System........... 168
Radio Theft Protection.................. 219
Readiness Codes .................... 365, 390
Rear Lights, Bulb
Replacement ............................... 327
Rear View Mirror........................... 147
Rear Window Defogger ................ 126
12/07/23 10:21:49 31TM8630_410
Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Reclining the Seat-backs ............... 141
Recommended Shift Points .......... 280
Remote Audio Controls................. 217
Remote Transmitter ...................... 135
Replacement Information
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 332
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 312
Fuses ........................................... 369
Light Bulbs ................................. 321
Maintenance MinderTM.............. 299
Tires ............................................ 341
Wiper Blades .............................. 332
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 24
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 396
Reserve Tank, Engine
Coolant ................................ 250, 315
Restraint, Child ................................ 38
Reverse Gear Position................... 273
Rotation, Tire ................................. 341
Safety Belts................................... 9, 21
Safety Defects, Reporting............. 396
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Safety Features .................................. 8
Airbags .......................................... 10
Seat Belts ........................................ 9
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 57
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Seat Belts ...................................... 9, 21
Additional Information ................ 21
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 23
Cleaning ...................................... 331
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 17, 22
Maintenance......................... 24, 331
Reminder Light and
Beeper ................................. 21, 62
System Components.................... 21
Use During Pregnancy................ 19
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder
Belt ...................................... 17, 22
Seats, Adjusting the ....................... 141
Security System ............................. 221
Serial Number ................................ 378
Service Intervals ............................ 308
Service Manual .............................. 397
Service Station Procedures .......... 245
Setting the Clock ........................... 220
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 271
2013 Insight
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Shift Lock Release ......................... 275
Side Airbags ............................... 10, 32
Off Indicator ........................... 34, 65
Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 33
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement ............................... 326
Signaling Turns .............................. 121
Snow Tires ...................................... 342
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 348
Specifications ............................. 381
Specifications Charts..................... 380
Speed Control ................................. 222
Speed-Sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC) ................ 187
Spotlights ........................................ 159
INDEX
S
H
CONTINUED
VII
12/07/23 10:21:53 31TM8630_411
Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS, Additional Information........... 25
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Advanced Airbag System ........... 30
Airbag Service .............................. 36
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 35
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 34
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32
How Your Side Curtain
Airbags Work ........................... 33
SRS Components ......................... 25
SRS Indicator.............................. 34, 64
START (Ignition Key Position) ... 132
Starting the Engine........................ 263
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 263
With a Dead Battery ................. 358
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 360
Steering Wheel
Adjustments ............................... 128
Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 131
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 346
VIII
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Sun Visors ....................................... 158
Supplemental Restraint System
Servicing ....................................... 36
SRS Indicator.......................... 34, 64
System Components.................... 25
SVC .................................................. 187
Synthetic Oil ................................... 311
T
Taillights, Changing
Bulbs ........................................... 330
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 347
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 382
Emissions Control Systems ...... 387
Emissions Testing ..................... 390
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 244
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 389
Temperature Indicator .................... 67
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51
Theft Protection............................. 219
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 388, 389
2013 Insight
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Tighten Fuel
Cap Message .............................. 247
Time, Setting the ........................... 220
Tire Chains ..................................... 342
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 349
Tire Information ............................ 382
Tire Labeling .................................. 383
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ............. 289, 385
Check TPMS .............................. 385
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator............................ 66, 289
Required Federal
Explanation............................. 385
Tires ................................................ 338
Air Pressure ............................... 339
Chains ......................................... 342
Checking Wear .......................... 340
Compact Spare ........................... 348
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 382
Inflation ....................................... 338
Inspection ................................... 339
Maintenance ............................... 340
Replacing .................................... 341
Rotating....................................... 341
Service Life ................................. 340
12/07/23 10:21:58 31TM8630_412
Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Tires
Snow ............................................ 342
Specifications ............................. 381
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 350
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 296
Emergency Towing ................... 374
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 318
Fluid Selection............................ 319
Identification Number............... 379
Shifting the Automatic .............. 272
Treadwear ...................................... 340
Trip Meter ........................................ 79
Turn Signals ................................... 121
H
I
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Vanity Mirror ................................. 158
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 257
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 380
Vehicle Identification Number..... 378
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )
System..................................... 293
VSA OFF Indicator .............. 65, 293
VSA Off Switch .......................... 294
VSA System Indicator ......... 65, 293
Vehicle Storage .............................. 346
Ventilation ...................................... 165
VIN .................................................. 378
Viscosity, Oil................................... 311
X
Y
Z
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Alignment and Balance ............. 340
Cleaning ...................................... 343
Compact Spare ........................... 348
Nut Wrench ................................ 350
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 150
Operating the Power ................. 149
Rear, Defogger .......................... 126
Windshield
Cleaning ...................................... 119
Defroster .................................... 166
Washers ...................................... 119
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 332
Operation .................................... 119
Worn Tires ..................................... 339
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 374
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 57
Warranty Coverages ..................... 395
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 317
Operation .................................... 119
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering .............. 128
2013 Insight
INDEX
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 347
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 382
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 244
USB Adapter Cable ....................... 205
USB Flash Memory Device .......... 203
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 314
K
V
W
U
J
IX
12/07/23 10:22:09 31TM8630_413
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
10.6 US gal (40 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 0W-20
detergent oil (see page 360 ).
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(CVTF):
Use Honda CVT Fluid
(continuously variable
transmission fluid) only
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 319 ).
Fluid change capacity:
3.0 US qt (2.8 )
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.4 US qt (3.2 )
2013 Insight
12/07/13 16:36:19 31TM8630_001
Owner’s Identification
OWNER
This owner’s manual should be considered a
permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
ADDRESS
This owner’s manual covers all models of the
Insight. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
2013 Insight
Images throughout this owner’s manual
(including the front cover) represent features
and equipment that are available on some,
but not all, models. Your particular model
may not have some of these features.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and without
incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising